You are on page 1of 313

BBU3900

Hardware Description

Issue 08
Date 2011-09-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the BBU3900 hardware, such as boards, module, ports, cables, and
connectors, and the functions of the hardware.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

DBS3900 WCDMA V200R013C00

iDBS3900 WCDMA V200R013C00

DBS3900 GSM V100R013C00

DBS3900 V100R004C00

DBS3900 LTE V100R003C00

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:
l Install engineers
l Field engineers
l System engineers

Organization
1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description
This provides the changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description.
2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description About This Document

The DBS3900 consists of the BBU3900 and different types of RRUs. The RRUs can be installed
remotely so that the DBS3900 can be used in various scenarios outdoors.

3 DBS3900 Power System

The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When
AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to
-48 V DC power for the base station.

4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the
cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and
UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to
achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.

5 BBU3900 Equipment

This describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels,
module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications.

6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables of the
DBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configured
in the DBS3900.

7 BBU3900 Cables

This describes the cables of the BBU3900 in terms of their appearance, pin assignment, and
installation positions.

8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

This describes the auxiliary devices of the BBU3900. The devices consist of the EMUA and
SLPU.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which


if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save


time.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description About This Document

Symbol Description

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement


important points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.


Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description About This Document

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description...........................................................................1
2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets........................................................................................................6
2.1 Exteriors and Functions of DBS3900 Cabinets..................................................................................................7
2.2 Structure of the Matched Cabinets for the DBS3900.........................................................................................9
2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A)...................................................................................29
2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).......................................................................33
2.5 Usage Scenario of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.............................................................................................41

3 DBS3900 Power System..............................................................................................................47


3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the APM30 or AMP30H (Ver.A)
................................................................................................................................................................................48
3.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the AMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H
(Ver.C)....................................................................................................................................................................49
3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06........................................54
3.4 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)....................................................................58
3.5 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)....................................................63
3.6 Power Distribution Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.......................................................................70

4 DBS3900 Monitoring System....................................................................................................73


4.1 BBU Monitoring Port.......................................................................................................................................74
4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)..............................................................................75
4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)................................................................76
4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06...................................................................................80
4.5 Customized Alarm Input..................................................................................................................................82

5 BBU3900 Equipment...................................................................................................................86
5.1 Exterior of the BBU3900..................................................................................................................................87
5.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900...............................................................................................................88
5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900...........................................................................................................88
5.2.2 WMPT...................................................................................................................................................100
5.2.3 GTMU...................................................................................................................................................104
5.2.4 LMPT.....................................................................................................................................................110
5.2.5 WBBP....................................................................................................................................................113
5.2.6 LBBP.....................................................................................................................................................116

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description Contents

5.2.7 FAN.......................................................................................................................................................120
5.2.8 UPEU.....................................................................................................................................................121
5.2.9 UEIU......................................................................................................................................................125
5.2.10 UTRP...................................................................................................................................................126
5.2.11 USCU...................................................................................................................................................132
5.2.12 UBRI....................................................................................................................................................134

6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900........................................................................................137


6.1 Power Cable Connections...............................................................................................................................138
6.1.1 Power Cable Connections for the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)..........................................................138
6.1.2 Power Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)..........................................142
6.1.3 Power Cable Connections of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.................................................................156
6.2 Transmission Cable Connections...................................................................................................................158
6.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM Only Base Station..........................................158
6.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM Only Base Station.............................................160
6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base Station........................................162
6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base Station..........................................165
6.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base Station............................................167
6.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station..............................................169
6.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
........................................................................................................................................................................170
6.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
........................................................................................................................................................................176
6.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission
Mode...............................................................................................................................................................181
6.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission
Mode...............................................................................................................................................................183
6.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
........................................................................................................................................................................184
6.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
........................................................................................................................................................................188
6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission
Mode...............................................................................................................................................................192
6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
........................................................................................................................................................................196
6.2.15 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
........................................................................................................................................................................199
6.2.16 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
........................................................................................................................................................................205
6.2.17 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission
Mode...............................................................................................................................................................210
6.2.18 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
........................................................................................................................................................................213
6.2.19 Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station.....................................................216
6.3 CPRI Cable Connections................................................................................................................................218
6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station....................................................................218

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description Contents

6.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base Station.......................................................................219


6.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station.................................................................220
6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station...................................................................................222
6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station..................................................................................223
6.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station...............................................................................225
6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Base Station..................................................................226
6.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections...........................................................................................................227
6.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)........................................227
6.4.2 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).......................234
6.4.3 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the OMB/IMB03/IFS06.....................................................242

7 BBU3900 Cables.........................................................................................................................245
7.1 List of BBU3900 Cables.................................................................................................................................247
7.2 PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................................249
7.3 BBU Power Cable..........................................................................................................................................250
7.4 BBU Power Cable (OMB)..............................................................................................................................251
7.5 BBU Power Cable (Ver.C).............................................................................................................................252
7.6 E1/T1 Cable....................................................................................................................................................253
7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable..........................................................................................................256
7.8 FE/GE Cable...................................................................................................................................................257
7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable...............................................................................................................258
7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports......................................................................................................259
7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports..........................................................................................................259
7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable....................................................................................................................................260
7.13 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable................................................................................................................................261
7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU.........................................................................264
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU........................................................................265
7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU.......................................................................266
7.17 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable..................................................................................................................267
7.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)...........................................................................................268
7.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)...........................................................................................268
7.20 BBU Alarm Cable........................................................................................................................................269
7.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable...............................................................................................................................271

8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900.........................................................................................272


8.1 EMUA............................................................................................................................................................274
8.2 OMB...............................................................................................................................................................274
8.3 IMB03.............................................................................................................................................................278
8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized Rack........................................................................................................................281
8.5 DCDU-03........................................................................................................................................................282
8.6 DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C..........................................................................................................................285
8.7 AC/DC Power Equipment..............................................................................................................................290
8.8 SLPU..............................................................................................................................................................294
8.8.1 Exterior of SLPU...................................................................................................................................294

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description Contents

8.8.2 Configuration of the SLPU....................................................................................................................295


8.8.3 UELP.....................................................................................................................................................296
8.8.4 UFLP.....................................................................................................................................................297
8.8.5 USLP2...................................................................................................................................................298
8.9 WGRU............................................................................................................................................................300

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

This provides the changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description.

08 (2011-09-30)
This is the eighth commercial issue.
Compared with issue 07 (2011-08-30), no information is added.
Compared with issue 07 (2011-08-30), the following part is modified:
Part Modification

5.2.3 GTMU The E1 bypass function is deleted.

5.2.10 UTRP The description of DIP switches is changed.

Compared with issue 07 (2011-08-30), no information is deleted.

07 (2011-08-30)
This is the seventh commercial issue.
Compared with issue 06 (2011-07-30), no information is added.
Compared with issue 06 (2011-07-30), the following part is modified:
Part Modification

5.2.5 WBBP Added the baseband transfer capacity of the


WBBP.

Compared with issue 06 (2011-07-30), no information is deleted.

06 (2011-07-30)
This is the sixth commercial issue.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

Compared with issue 05 (2011-06-25), no information is added.

Compared with issue 05 (2011-06-25), the following part is modified:

Part Modification

2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and Added the requirements of customer
APM30H (Ver.A) equipment specifications.

2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B)


or APM30H (Ver.C)

Compared with issue 05 (2011-06-25), no information is deleted.

05 (2011-06-25)
This is the fifth commercial issue.

Compared with issue 04 (2011-05-25), no information is added.

Compared with issue 04 (2011-05-25), the following part is modified:

Part Modification

5.2.8 UPEU Added the description of the power of the


UPEU.

Compared with issue 04 (2011-05-25), no information is deleted.

04 (2011-05-25)
This is the fourth commercial issue.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-04-30), no information is added.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-04-30), the following part is modified:

Part Modification

3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and The recommended configurations of the


Power Cables for the OMB, IMB03, and upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
IFS06 are modified.

3.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level


Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the
AMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)

Compared with issue 03 (2011-04-30), no information is deleted.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

03 (2011-04-30)
This is the third commercial issue.

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-10), this issue is added with the following topic:
l 2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A)
l 2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
l 2.5 Usage Scenario of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
l 3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the
APM30 or AMP30H (Ver.A)
l 3.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the
AMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
l 3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
l 3.4 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
l 3.5 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
l 3.6 Power Distribution Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
l 4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
l 4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
l 4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
l 6.1.1 Power Cable Connections for the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
l 6.1.2 Power Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
l 6.1.3 Power Cable Connections of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
l 6.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
l 6.4.2 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H
(Ver.C)
l 6.4.3 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the OMB/IMB03/IFS06

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-10), no information is changed.

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-10), no information is deleted.

02 (2011-04-10)
This is the second commercial issue.

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), no information is added.

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), the following part is modified:

Part Modification

5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900 The maximum quantity of the WBBP is
modified.

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), no information is deleted.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

01 (2011-03-30)
This is the first commercial issue.
Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-10), no information is added.
Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-10), no information is changed.
Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-10), no information is deleted.

Draft B (2011-03-10)
This is the Draft version.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-30), no information is added.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-30), the following part is modified:
Part Modification

6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Some descriptions are optimized.


Base Station

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-30), no information is deleted.

Draft A (2011-01-30)
This is the Draft version.
Compared with issue MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, and GSM-BTS
V100R012C00, this issue is added with the following topic:
l 3 DBS3900 Power System
l Cabinets for the DBS3900
l 6.2.19 Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station
l 6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Base Station
l 8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized Rack
Compared with issue MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, and GSM-BTS
V100R012C00, the following part is modified:
Part Modification

5.2.7 FAN The description of the FANc is added.

5.2.8 UPEU The description of the UPEUc is added.

6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the The description of triple mode scenario is
Triple-Mode Base Station added.

5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900

6.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable


Connections of the APM30 or APM30H
(Ver.A)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

Part Modification

2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and


APM30H (Ver.A)

Compared with issue MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, and GSM-BTS


V100R012C00, no information is deleted.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

About This Chapter

The DBS3900 consists of the BBU3900 and different types of RRUs. The RRUs can be installed
remotely so that the DBS3900 can be used in various scenarios outdoors.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

2.1 Exteriors and Functions of DBS3900 Cabinets


As required in outdoor scenarios, Huawei offers multiple cabinets with different functions for
the DBS3900. The cabinets are the APM series cabinets such as the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A),
APM30H (Ver.B), and APM30H (Ver.C), TMC series cabinets such as the TMC, TMC11H
(Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B), and TMC11H(Ver.C), and storage battery cabinets such as the BBC,
IBBS200D, and IBBS200T.

Exterior
Figure 2-1 shows the exterior of the DBS3900 cabinet.

Figure 2-1 Exterior of the DBS3900 cabinet

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Function
NOTE
For details about the functions of the matched cabinets, see the APM30 User Guide, APM30H User
Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D/T User Guide, and APM30H(Ver.C) Product Description.

The main functions of the DBS3900 cabinet are as follows:


l The advanced power module (APM) series cabinets are the power cabinets, which are used
for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The APM series cabinets provide AC
and DC power distribution functions for distributed base stations and separate base stations
used outdoors and also provide space for customer equipment.
l The differences between the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A) are heat dissipation and
monitoring modes. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger
cooler. The APM30 uses the breathable film and fans for heat dissipation, and the APM30H
(Ver.A) uses the core of the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation fans for heat
dissipation. The APM30 is configured with the APM power monitoring interface unit
(APMI) and APM fan monitoring interface unit (AFMU) for environment and power
monitoring, and the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the heat exchange unit type A
(HEUA) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting.
l The differences between the APM30H (Ver.A) and the APM30H (Ver.B) are monitoring
and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the HEUA for fan
monitoring and alarm reporting, and the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the central
monitoring unit type A (CMUA) for centralized monitoring. The APM30H (Ver.A) is
configured with the power distribution unit (PDU) for power distribution, and the APM30H
(Ver.B) is configured with the embedded power supply system (EPS) for power
distribution. In addition, the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the electronic labeling
unit (ELU) for automatic reporting of cabinet type.
l The differences between the APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.B) are monitoring and
power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.C) is configured with the central monitoring
unit type E (CMUE) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting, and the APM30H (Ver.B) is
configured with the CMUA for centralized monitoring. The APM30H (Ver.C) is configured
with the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) for power distribution, and the APM30H
(Ver.B) is configured with the EPS for power distribution.
l The transmission cabinet (TMC) series cabinets are the transmission cabinets used for
Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The TMC series cabinets provide DC
power distribution functions for distributed base stations and separate base stations and
also provide space for customer equipment.
l The differences between the TMC and the TMC11H (Ver.A) are heat dissipation and
monitoring modes. The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.A) and the TMC11H
(Ver.B) are monitoring modes. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-
exchanger cooler. The TMC uses the breathable film and fans for heat dissipation, and the
TMC11H (Ver.A) uses the core of the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation
fans for heat dissipation. The TMC is configured with the APMI and AFMU for monitoring,
the TMC11H (Ver.A) is configured with the HEUA for monitoring, and the TMC11H
(Ver.B) is configured with the CMUA and HPMI for monitoring. In addition, the TMC11H
(Ver.B) is configured with the ELU for automatic reporting of cabinet type.
l The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.C) and the TMC11H (Ver.B) are monitoring
and power distribution modes. The TMC11H (Ver.C) is configured with the CMUE for fan
monitoring and alarm reporting, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured with the CMUA
for centralized monitoring. The TMC11H (Ver.C) is configured with the DCDU-11B for

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

power distribution, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured with the DCDU-03B for power
distribution. DCDU is short for direct current distribution unit.
l Storage battery cabinets are used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The
cabinets provide space for storage batteries, which provide long-duration backup power
for the distributed base station and separate base station. The differences between the
integrated battery backup system with direct cooler (IBBS200D) and the integrated battery
backup system with TEC (IBBS200T) are the configurations of the modules in the cabinets.
For details, see Structure of the Matched Cabinets for the DBS3900. TEC is short for
thermoelectric cooling unit.
For exteriors and functions of the outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box-03 (IMB03), and
indoor floor installation support-06 (IFS06), see 8.2 OMB, 8.3 IMB03, and IFS06 respectively.

2.2 Structure of the Matched Cabinets for the DBS3900


This section describes the module or board configurations of the matched cabinets for the
DBS3900.

APM
The APM series cabinets are classified into the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B),
and APM30H (Ver.C) based on different versions. Figure 2-2 shows the module configurations
in the APM series cabinets.

Figure 2-2 Module configurations in the APM series cabinets

The APM series cabinets are different from each other in heat dissipation, power distribution,
and monitoring modes. The differences are achieved through the internal components of the
cabinets, as listed in Table 2-1.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Table 2-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets


Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio
Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

APM30 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan box


configured
with a fan,
APM power
monitoring
interface unit
(APMI), and
APM fan
monitoring
interface unit
(AFMU) is
installed on
the top of the
cabinet.

2 PDU Mandatory 1 The power


distribution
unit (PDU)
distributes
AC power
and DC
power.

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The


baseband
unit (BBU) is
installed in
the 2 U space
under the
PDU,
processing
baseband
signals.

4 PSU (AC/ Mandatory 3 The power


DC) supply unit
(PSU)
converts 220
V AC power
into –48 V
DC power. It
is configured
only in the
AC cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

5 PMU Mandatory 1 The power


monitoring
unit (PMU)
is configured
only in the
AC cabinet.

APM30H 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan box


(Ver.A) configured
with a fan,
heat
exchange
unit type A
(HEUA),
and HERT
power
monitoring
interface unit
(HPMI) is
installed on
the top of the
cabinet.
HERT is
short for
Huawei
Enhanced
Radio
Technology.

2 PDU Mandatory 1 The PDU


distributes
AC power
and DC
power.

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU is


installed in
the 2 U space
under the
PDU,
processing
baseband
signals.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

4 PSU (AC/ Mandatory 3 The PSU


DC) converts 220
V AC power
into –48 V
DC power. It
is configured
only in the
AC cabinet.

5 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU is


configured
only in the
AC cabinet.

APM30H 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan box


(Ver.B) configured
with a fan,
HPMI, and
central
monitoring
unit type A
(CMUA) is
installed on
the top of the
cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protect


trunk
signals, a
signal
lightning
protection
unit (SLPU)
configured
with the
universal E1/
T1 lightning
protection
unit (UELP)
or universal
FE lightning
protection
unit (UFLP)
is
mandatory.
The SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
on the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s is
optional. The
SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
under the
BBU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

3 EPS Mandatory 1 The


embedded
power
supply
system
(EPS)
distributes
AC power
and DC
power. It is
configured
only in the
APM30H
(Ver.B).

4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU is


installed in
the 2 U space
under the
EPS,
processing
baseband
signals.

5 PSU (AC/ Mandatory 3 The PSU


DC) converts 220
V AC power
into –48 V
DC power. It
is configured
only in the
AC cabinet.

6 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU is


configured
only in the
AC cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

APM30H 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan box


(Ver.C) configured
with a fan,
HPMI, and
central
monitoring
unit type E
(CMUE) is
installed on
the top of the
cabinet.

2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protect


trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with the
UELP or
UFLP is
mandatory.
The SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
on the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s is
optional. The
SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
under the
BBU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

3 EPU Mandatory 1 The


embedded
power
subrack unit
(EPU)
distributes
AC power
and DC
power. It is
configured
only in the
APM30H
(Ver.C).

4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU is


installed in
the 2 U space
under the
EPU,
processing
baseband
signals.

5 PSU (AC/ Mandatory 3 The PSU


DC) converts 220
V AC power
into –48 V
DC power. It
is configured
only in the
AC cabinet.

6 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU is


configured
only in the
AC cabinet.

TMC
The transmission cabinet (TMC) series cabinets are classified into the TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A),
and TMC11H (Ver.B) based on different versions. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet
with heat-exchanger cooler. The TMC series cabinets can also be classified into the following
two types based on different application scenarios:
l TMC providing space for the transmission equipment, as shown in Figure 2-3.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-3 TMC series cabinets (1)

l TMC configured with the BBU in the –48 V DC power supply scenario, as shown in Figure
2-4.

Figure 2-4 TMC series cabinets (2)

The TMC series cabinets are different from each other in heat dissipation and monitoring modes.
The differences are achieved through the internal components of the cabinets, as listed in Table
2-2.

Table 2-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

TMC 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan box


configured
with a fan,
APMI, and
AFMU is
installed on
the top of the
cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

2 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l The TMC


is
configure
d with a
direct
current
distributi
on
unit-03C
(DCDU-
03C)
when the
TMC
provides
only
space for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The TMC
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B in the
–48 V DC
power
supply
scenario.

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU is


installed in
the 2 U space
under the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

TMC11H 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan box


(Ver.A) configured
with a fan,
HEUA, and
HPMI is
installed on
the top of the
cabinet.

2 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l The


TMC11H
(Ver.A)
is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the TMC
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.A)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B in the
–48 V DC
power
supply
scenario.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU is


installed in
the 2 U space
under the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.

TMC11H 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan box


(Ver.B) configured
with a fan,
HPMI, and
CMUA is
installed on
the top of the
cabinet.

2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protect


trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with the
UELP or
UFLP is
mandatory.
The SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
on the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be
configured.
The SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
under the
BBU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

3 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l The


TMC11H
(Ver.B) is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the TMC
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B in the
–48 V DC
power
supply
scenario.

4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU is


installed in
the 2 U space
under the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

TMC11H 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan box


(Ver.C) configured
with a fan,
HPMI, and
CMUE is
installed on
the top of the
cabinet.

2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protect


trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with the
UELP or
UFLP is
mandatory.
The SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
on the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be
configured.
The SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
under the
BBU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

3 DCDU-11 Mandatory 1 l The


TMC11H
(Ver.C) is
configure
d with a
DCDU-1
1C when
the TMC
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-1
1B in the
–48 V DC
power
supply
scenario.

4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU is


installed in
the 2 U space
under the
DCDU-11B,
processing
baseband
signals.

BBC/IBBS
The battery cabinets are classified into the BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200T (Ver.B),
IBBS200T (Ver.C), and IBBS200D based on different versions. BBC is short for battery backup
cabinet. Figure 2-5 shows the module configurations in the battery cabinets.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-5 Module configurations in the battery cabinets

The IBBS200D is different from the IBBS200T in heat dissipation mode. The differences are
achieved through the monitoring modules installed in different positions in the cabinets, as listed
in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3 Functions of the components in the battery cabinets


Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio
Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

BBC 1 Power Mandatory 1 The power


supply box supply box
for the feeds power
heating film to the heating
film.

2 Ground bar Mandatory 1 The ground


of the cabinet bar is used
for the
grounding of
the
components
in the
cabinet.

3 Storage Mandatory 8 The storage


battery battery
provides
long-
duration
backup
power for a
base station.

4 BBC Mandatory 4 The BBC


provides
power to
storage
batteries.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

IBBS200T 1 TEC Mandatory 1 The


(Ver.A) thermoelectr
ic cooling
unit (TEC) is
installed in
the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
fan, heat-
dissipation
piece, and
monitoring
board.

2 Transfer Mandatory 1 The transfer


terminal for terminal
signal cables block is
installed on
the inner side
of the front
door of the
cabinet. It
consists of
four
interconnecti
on terminals.

3 Transfer Mandatory 1 The transfer


terminal for terminal is
the input installed on
power cable the inner side
for the TEC of the front
door of the
cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

4 Heat Mandatory 1 The heat


insulation insulation
foam foam is
installed on
the left in the
cabinet.

5 Storage Mandatory 8 The storage


battery battery
provides
long-
duration
backup
power for a
base station.

6 Junction box Mandatory 1 The junction


for the power box is
cable installed on
the right in
the
IBBS200T.
It consists of
the copper
bar, circuit
breaker for
the batteries,
and circuit
breaker for
the TEC.

IBBS200D 1 Fan Mandatory 2 The fan is


installed on
the front
door of the
cabinet,
dissipating
heat in the
cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

2 CMUA Mandatory 1 The CMUA


provides
functions of
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.

3 Storage Mandatory 8 The storage


battery battery
provides
long-
duration
backup
power for a
base station.

4 Power Mandatory 1 The power


distribution distribution
box box is
installed on
the upper
right side of
the cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and to
storage
batteries.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

IBBS200T 1 TEC Mandatory 1 The TEC is


(Ver.B)/ installed in
(Ver.C) the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
fan, heat-
dissipation
piece, and
monitoring
board.

2 CMUA Mandatory 1 The CMUA


provides
functions of
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet SN Module/ Optional/ Maximum Descriptio


Type Board Mandatory Number n
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet

3 Power Mandatory 8 The power


distribution distribution
box box is
installed on
the upper
right side of
the cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and to
storage
batteries.

4 Storage Mandatory 1 The storage


battery battery
provides
long-
duration
backup
power for a
base station.

OMB/IMB03/IFS06
For the structures of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06, see 8.2 OMB, 8.3 IMB03, and IFS06
respectively.

2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A)


In outdoor scenarios, multiple cabinets and different configurations of cabinets can be used for
a DBS3900 to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity.

Cabinet Configuration Principles


NOTE
In this section, the APM is APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A), and the TMC is TMC or TMC11H(Ver.A).
l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. If there are more than
12 RRUs, they must be configured in different base stations.
l A single APM or TMC can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

l A single APM supports only one TMC and a maximum of one integrated battery backup
system with TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.
l A maximum of six power cables and twelve 2-wire fiber optic cables can be led out from
a single APM.
l A single DCDU supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.
l The APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on the battery cabinet.
l A backup battery cabinet (BBC) or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same
type or be stacked under a TMC.
l If an extension cabinet such as a battery cabinet or transmission cabinet is required during
an initial site deployment, the extension cabinet is placed on the left, and the basic cabinet
is placed on the right. If both an extension battery cabinet and an extension transmission
cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is placed on the left of the basic cabinet and the
transmission cabinet is placed onto the battery cabinet or on the left of the battery cabinet.
l Clearance must be reserved during an initial site deployment for future capacity expansion.
In a capacity expansion scenario, the original cabinets are not relocated and new cabinets
are added only to the right of the original cabinets unless they are required to be installed
to the left of the original cabinets in exactly the reverse order of the original cabinets.

Requirements of Customer Equipment Specifications


Customer equipment to be installed in a Huawei cabinet must satisfy the following requirements:
l Dimension requirements (as shown in Figure 2-6):
– The customer equipment must be 19-inch wide, which is the width of the standard
equipment.
– The maximum depth of the customer equipment is 310 mm if the equipment supports
natural ventilation or has air vents on the right and left; the maximum depth of the
customer equipment is 280 mm if the equipment has air vents in the front and back.
– A maximum cabling pace in front of the panel is 70 mm.
l Requirement for air vents:
– If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right
and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to
back.
– If the customer equipment support natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be
reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.
l Requirement for temperature
– In areas where the highest temperature is or is below 40°C, the customer must be able
to function properly at –10°C temperature or even lower temperature and at 55°C or
even higher temperature.
– In areas where the highest temperature is above 40°C, the customer must be able to
function properly at –10°C temperature or even lower temperature and at 60°C or even
higher temperature.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-6 Requirements of customer equipment dimension and ventilation

(1) Customer equipment with (2) Customer equipment with air (3) Customer equipment with air
natural ventilation vents on the right and left vents on the front and back

Cabinet Configurations in a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Base Station


NOTE
The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario only.

A single-mode or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is
installed in the APM. When 6 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APMs are required. The BBU is
installed in the basic APM, which is on the left.

The configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the


requirements for power backup, reserved space, and RRU configuration. Table 2-4 lists the
configurations.

Table 2-4 Cabinet configurations in a single-mode or dual-mode base station

Input Power Backup Reserved RRU Cabinet


Power Space Configuration
Requirement

110 V AC or No backup ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM


220 V AC power
requirement ≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM and
one TMC

≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs

≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs and


one TMC

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Input Power Backup Reserved RRU Cabinet


Power Space Configuration
Requirement

0.5- or 2-hour ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM and


backup power one IBBS

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM, one


TMC, and one
IBBS

≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs and


two IBBSs

≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs, two


IBBSs, and one
TMC

–48 V DC - ≤9U ≤ 6 RRUs One TMC with


one built-in
DCDU

≤8U ≤ 12 RRUs One TMC with


two built-in
DCDUs

In a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if no power backup is required, the cabinet
configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements
of reserved space and RRU configuration. Figure 2-7 shows the configurations.

Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if no power


backup is required

If the 0.5- or 2-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or
dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved space and RRU
configuration. Figure 2-8 shows the configurations.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if the 0.5- or 2-
hour backup power is required

In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode


base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved space and RRU configuration.
Figure 2-9 shows the configurations.

Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a –48 V DC


power supply scenario

2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H


(Ver.C)
In outdoor scenarios, multiple cabinets and different configurations of cabinets can be used for
the DBS3900 to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity.

Cabinet Configuration Principles


l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 remote radio units (RRUs).
If there are more than 12 RRUs, they must be configured in more than one DBS3900.
l A single advanced power module (APM) or transmission cabinet (TMC) can provide power
to a maximum of six RRUs.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

l A single APM can be configured with only one TMC and a maximum of two integrated
battery backup systems with direct cooler (IBBS200Ds) or integrated battery backup
systems with TEC (IBBS200Ts). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.
l A maximum of six power cables and twelve 2-wire fiber optic cables can be led out from
a single APM.
l A single direct current distribution unit (DCDU) supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.
l The APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on the storage battery cabinet.
l A backup battery cabinet (BBC) or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same
type or be stacked under a TMC.
l If an auxiliary cabinet such as a storage battery cabinet or transmission cabinet is required
during an initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is placed on the left, and the basic
cabinet is placed on the right. If both the storage battery cabinet and the transmission cabinet
are required, the storage battery cabinet is placed on the left of the basic cabinet and the
transmission cabinet is placed onto the storage battery cabinet or on the left of the storage
battery cabinet.
l Clearance must be reserved during an initial site deployment for future capacity expansion.
In the capacity expansion scenario, the original cabinets are not relocated and new cabinets
are added only to the right of the original cabinets unless they are required to be installed
to the left of the original cabinets in exactly the reverse order of the original cabinets.

Requirements of Customer Equipment Specifications


Customer equipment to be installed in a Huawei cabinet must satisfy the following requirements:
l Dimension requirements (as shown in Figure 2-10):
– The customer equipment must be 19-inch wide, which is the width of the standard
equipment.
– The maximum depth of the customer equipment is 280 mm if the equipment supports
natural ventilation or has air vents on the right and left; the maximum depth of the
customer equipment is 250 mm if the equipment has air vents in the front and back.
– A maximum cabling pace in front of the panel is 100 mm.
l Requirement for air vents:
– If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right
and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to
back.
– If the customer equipment support natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be
reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.
l Requirement for temperature
– In areas where the highest temperature is or is below 40°C, the customer must be able
to function properly at –10°C temperature or even lower temperature and at 55°C or
even higher temperature.
– In areas where the highest temperature is above 40°C, the customer must be able to
function properly at –10°C temperature or even lower temperature and at 60°C or even
higher temperature.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-10 Requirements of customer equipment dimension and ventilation

(1) Customer equipment with (2) Customer equipment with air (3) Customer equipment with air
natural ventilation vents on the right and left vents on the front and back

Cabinet Configurations in a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Scenario


Only one baseband unit (BBU) is configured in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario and the
BBU is installed in the APM. If 7 to 12 RRUs are configured in a DBS3900, two APMs are
required and the BBU is configured in the left APM cabinet, which is the basic APM.
The configuration of a DBS3900 in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario varies depending on
the requirements of power backup, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration.
Table 2-5 lists the configurations.

Table 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station


Power Supply Power Reserved Carrier Cabinet
Backup Clearance Frequency Configuration
Configuration

110 V AC or No power ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM


220 V AC backup
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM and
one TMC

≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs

≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs and


one TMC

0.5-hour or 2- ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM and


hour backup one IBBS
power

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Power Supply Power Reserved Carrier Cabinet


Backup Clearance Frequency Configuration
Configuration

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM, one


TMC, and one
IBBS

≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs and


two IBBSs

≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs, two


IBBSs, and one
TMC

4-hour, 6-hour, ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM and


or 8-hour two IBBSs
backup power
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM, two
IBBSs, and one
TMC

≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs and


four IBBSs

≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs,


four IBBSs, and
one TMC

–48 V DC - ≤9U ≤ 6 RRUs One TMC with


one built-in
DCDU

≤8U ≤ 12 RRUs One TMC with


two built-in
DCDUs

+24 V DC - ≤5U ≤ 6 RRUs One +24 V DC


APM30H
(Ver.B)

In a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if there is no backup power requirement,


the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the
requirements of reserved clearance and carrier frequency configuration. Figure 2-11 shows the
configurations.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if no backup


power is required

If the 0.5-hour backup power or 2-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of
a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved
clearance and carrier frequency configuration. Figure 2-12 shows the configurations.

Figure 2-12 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if the 0.5-hour
or 2-hour backup power is required

If the 4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a single-
mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved clearance and
carrier frequency configuration. Figure 2-13 shows the configurations.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if the 4-hour,
6-hour, or 8-hour backup power is required

In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode


base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved space and carrier frequency
configuration. Figure 2-14 shows the configurations.

Figure 2-14 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a –48 V DC


power supply scenario

Figure 2-15 shows the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a
+24 V DC power supply scenario.

Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a +24 V DC


power supply scenario

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode DBS3900


Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. The basic BBU is BBU0, which is
installed in the basic APM or TMC on the left. The extension BBU is BBU1, which is installed
in the extension APM or TMC on the right.
The configuration of a triple-mode DBS3900 varies depending on the requirements of power
backup, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration. Table 2-6 lists the
configurations.

Table 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode DBS3900


Power Supply Power Reserved Carrier Cabinet
Backup Clearance Frequency Configuration
Configuration

110 V AC or No power ≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs


220 V AC backup
≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs and
one TMC

0.5-hour or 2- ≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs and


hour backup two IBBSs
power
≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs, two
IBBSs, and one
TMC

4-hour, 6-hour, ≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs and


or 8-hour four IBBSs
backup power
≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs,
four IBBSs, and
one TMC

–48 V DC - ≤ 18 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two TMC

+24 V DC - ≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two +24 V DC


APM30Hs
(Ver.B)

In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if no backup power is required, the cabinet
configuration of a triple-mode base station varies depending on the requirement of reserved
clearance. Figure 2-16 shows the configurations.

Figure 2-16 Cabinet configurations of a triple mode DBS3900 if no backup power is required

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

If 0.5-hour or 2-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base
station varies depending on the requirement of reserved clearance. Figure 2-17 shows the
configurations.

Figure 2-17 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station if the 0.5-hour or 2-hour backup
power is required

If the 4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a triple-
mode base station varies depending on the requirement of reserved clearance. Figure 2-18 shows
the configurations.

Figure 2-18 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station if the 4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour
backup power is required

Figure 2-19 shows the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a –48 V DC power
supply scenario.

Figure 2-19 Cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a –48 V DC power supply
scenario

Figure 2-20 shows the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a +24 V DC power
supply scenario.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-20 Cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a +24 V DC power supply
scenario

2.5 Usage Scenario of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06


In outdoor scenarios, multiple cabinets and different configurations of cabinets are used for the
DBS3900 to meet various requirements for usage environment, power input, reserved clearance,
and carrier frequency configuration.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Base Station


If a DBS3900 is configured with an outdoor mini box (OMB) or with an indoor mini box (IMB03)
in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, only one baseband unit (BBU) can be configured and
is configured in the OMB or the IMB03 and remote radio units (RRUs) can be installed on a
pole, a wall, a U-steel, or an angle steel.

If a DBS3900 is configured with both the IMB03 and the indoor floor installation support
(IFS06), the IMB03 and the IFS06 can be installed together, a scenario where the DBS3900 is
installed on an indoor centralized rack (ICR).

The configuration of a DBS3900 in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario varies depending on


the requirements of usage environment, power input, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency
configuration. Table 2-7 lists the configurations.

Table 2-7 Cabinet configurations in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

Power Supply Reserved Carrier Cabinet Application


Clearance Frequency Configuration Environment
Configuration

110 V AC or ≤3U One RRU One OMB Outdoors


220 V AC
≤6U Six RRUs Two IMB03s Indoors
and one IFS06

≤ 12 U 12 RRUs Four IMB03s


and two IFS06s

≤3U One RRU One IMB03

–48 V DC ≤3U Three RRUs One OMB Outdoors

≤3U Six RRUs One IMB03 and Indoors


one IFS06

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Power Supply Reserved Carrier Cabinet Application


Clearance Frequency Configuration Environment
Configuration

≤6U 12 RRUs Two IMB03s


and two IFS06s

≤3U Six RRUs One IMB03

+24 V DC ≤6U Six RRUs Two IMB03s Indoors


and one IFS06

≤ 12 U 12 RRUs Four IMB03s


and two IFS06s

Figure 2-21 shows the configuration of an OMB in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario in a


110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario.

Figure 2-21 Configuration of an OMB in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

Figure 2-22 shows the configurations of an ICR in a single-mode or dual mode base station.

Figure 2-22 Configuration of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station

Figure 2-23 shows the configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-23 Configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station

Figure 2-24 shows the configuration of an OMB in a –48 V DC power supply scenario.

Figure 2-24 Cabinet configurations of an OMB in a single-mode or dual-mode base station in


the –48 V DC power supply scenario

Figure 2-25 shows the configuration of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station

Figure 2-25 Cabinet configurations of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the
–48 V DC power supply scenario

Figure 2-26 shows the configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-26 Configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the –48
V DC power supply scenario

Figure 2-27 shows the configurations of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station in
a +24 V DC power supply scenario.

Figure 2-27 Configurations of an ICR in a single-mode and dual-mode base station in the +24
V DC power supply scenario

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station


If a DBS3900 is configured with an ICR, the DBS3900 can be configured as a triple-mode base
station. In this case, two BBUs are required. The basic BBU is BBU0 and is placed on the left
or on the upper ICR. The extension BBU is BBU1 and is placed on the right or on the lower
ICR.
NOTE
If a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB or an IMB03, the DBS3900 can only be configured as a single-
mode or dual-mode base station.

The configuration of a DBS3900 in a triple-mode scenario varies depending on the requirements


of usage environment, power input, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration.
Table 2-8 lists the configurations.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Table 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station


Power Supply Reserved Carrier Cabinet Application
Clearance Frequency Configuration Environment
Configuration

110 V AC or ≤ 12 U 12 RRUs Four IMB03s Indoors


220 V AC and two IFS06s

–48 V DC ≤6U Six RRUs Two IMB03s


and one IFS06

≤6U 12 RRUs Two IMB03s


and two IFS06s

+24 V DC ≤ 12 U 12 RRUs Four IMB03s


and two IFS06s

Figure 2-28 shows the configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the 110 V AC
or 220 V AC power supply scenario.

Figure 2-28 Configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the 110 V AC or 220 V
AC power supply scenario

Figure 2-29 shows the configuration of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the –48 V DC
power supply scenario.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-29 Configuration of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the –48 V DC power supply
scenario

Figure 2-30 shows the configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DC
power supply scenario.

Figure 2-30 Configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DC power
supply scenario

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

3 DBS3900 Power System

About This Chapter

The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When
AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to
-48 V DC power for the base station.

Table 3-1, Table 3-2, and Table 3-3 list the input voltage ranges supported by the DBS3900.

Table 3-1 Applicable AC input voltage ranges

Power Input Type Rated Voltage Working Voltage

220 V AC single-phase 200 V AC to 240 V AC 176 V AC to 290 V AC

220/380 V AC three-phase 200/346 V AC to 240/415 V 176/304 V AC to 290/500 V


AC AC

110 V AC dual-live-wire 100/200 V AC to 120/240 V 90/180 V AC to 135/270 V


AC AC

Table 3-2 -48 V DC input voltage range

Power Input Type Rated Voltage

-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Table 3-3 +24 V DC input voltage range

Power Input Type Rated Voltage

+24 V DC +21.6 V DC to +29 V DC

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and


Power Cables for the APM30 or AMP30H (Ver.A)
This section lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power
cables for the APM30 and the APM30H (Ver.A). The configurations are based on the maximum
configuration of a DBS3900 and supply power to customer equipment in the cabinet. The
maximum configuration indicates that the DBS3900 is configured with a maximum combination
of modules and a maximum combination of cabinets. APM is short for advanced power module.
APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
Table 3-4 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power
cables when the DBS3900 is configured with an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in an outdoor
scenario with AC power supply.

Table 3-4 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if
the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured
Power Supply Requirement for Cross-Sectional Length of the
the Circuit Area of the Power Power Cable
Breaker for Cable
Customer
Equipment

220 V AC single- 1 x 32 A 4 mm2 or 6 mm2 ≤ 40 m


phase power

220 V AC three- 3 x 20 A 2.5 mm2 ≤ 40 m


phase power

110 V AC dual-live- 2 x 32 A 2.5 mm2 ≤ 40 m


wire power

Table 3-5 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power
cables when the DBS3900 is configured with a transmission cabinet (TMC) or TMC11H (Ver.A)
in an outdoor scenario with DC power supply. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with
heat-exchanger cooler.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Table 3-5 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if
the TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) is configured

Power Supply Requirement for Cross-Sectional Length of the


the Circuit Area of the Power Power Cable
Breaker for Cable
Customer
Equipment

220 V AC single- Minimum of 1 x 32 A 16 mm2 ≤ 15 m


phase power and maximum of 1 x
80 A (both using the
one-level magnetic
blast breaker)

3.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and


Power Cables for the AMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
This section lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power
cables for the APM30H (Ver.B) and the APM30H (Ver.C). The configurations are based on the
maximum configuration of a DBS3900 and supply power to customer equipment in the cabinet.
The maximum configuration indicates that the DBS3900 is configured with a maximum
combination of modules and a maximum combination of cabinets. APM30H is short for
advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.

In an outdoor scenario with AC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the APM30H
(Ver.B). Table 3-6 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and
power cables in this scenario.

Table 3-6 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if
the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured

Power Supply Requirement for Cross-Sectional Length of the


the Circuit Area of the Power Power Cable
Breaker for Cable
Customer
Equipment

220 V AC single- Minimum of 1 x 50 A 6 mm2 ≤ 40 m


phase power and maximum of 1 x
63 A (both using the
110 V AC dual-live- two-level magnetic
wire power blast breaker)

220 V AC three- Minimum of 1 x 25 A 2.5 mm2 ≤ 40 m


phase power and maximum of 1 x
32 A (both using the
three-level magnetic
blast breaker)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

In an outdoor scenario with AC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the APM30H
(Ver.C). Table 3-7 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and
power cables in this scenario.

Table 3-7 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if
the APM30H (Ver.C) is configured
Power Supply Requirement for Cross-Sectional Length of the
the Circuit Area of the Power Power Cable
Breaker for Cable
Customer
Equipment

220 V AC single- 1 x 63 A (using the 16 mm2 ≤ 40 m


phase power two-level magnetic
blast breaker)

110 V AC dual-live- 1 x 70 A (using the


wire power two-level magnetic
blast breaker)

220 V AC three- 1 x 25 A (using the 4 mm2 ≤ 40 m


phase power three-level magnetic
blast breaker)

In an outdoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the TMC11H
(Ver.B). Table 3-8 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and
power cables in this scenario.

Table 3-8 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if
the TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured
Power Supply Requirement for Cross-Sectional Length of the
the Circuit Area of the Power Power Cable
Breaker for Cable
Customer
Equipment

–48 V DC Minimum of 1 x 32 A 25 mm2 ≤ 15 m


and maximum of 1 x
80 A (both using the
one-level magnetic
blast breaker)

In an outdoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the TMC11H
(Ver.C). Table 3-9 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and
power cables in this scenario.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Table 3-9 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if
the TMC11H (Ver.C) is configured
Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of
Configuration(1)(2) Requirement for Power Cable the Power
(3) the Circuit Cable
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

l Four to Six RRUs 1 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for one external ≤10 m


(power<300 W) DC power input
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l One to Three 1 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for one external


RRUs DC power input
(power<300 W)
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l Four to Six RRUs 1 x 160 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one


(400 W≤ external DC power input
power<560 W)
2 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for two external
l One BBU
DC power inputs(7)
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l One to Three 1 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for one external


RRUs (400 W≤ DC power input
power<560 W)
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l Four to Six RRUs 1 x 100 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one


(300 W≤ external DC power input
power<400 W)
l One BBU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of


Configuration(1)(2) Requirement for Power Cable the Power
(3) the Circuit Cable
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l Transmission 2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two external
equipment DC power inputs(7)
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l One to Three 1 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for one external


RRUs (300 W≤ DC power input
power<400 W)
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l Three RRUs 1 x 100 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one


(power<300 W) external DC power input
l Three RRUs (300
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two external
W≤power<400
W) DC power inputs(7)
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l Three RRUs 1 x 160 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one


(power<300 W) external DC power input
l Three RRUs (400
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two external
W≤power<560
W) DC power inputs(7)
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l Three RRUs (300 1 x 160 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one


W≤power<400 external DC power input
W)
l Three RRUs (400
W≤power<560
W)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of


Configuration(1)(2) Requirement for Power Cable the Power
(3) the Circuit Cable
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l One BBU 2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two external
l Transmission DC power inputs(7)
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

NOTE

(1) If both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs exist in the same base station, the power configuration
for high-power RRUs will apply for the base station.
(2) If possible, it is suggested to configure the base station with the power configuration for maximum
high-power RRUs so as to satisfy all scenarios. If the power configuration has to be in accordance with
actual scenarios, the circuit breaker and power cables need to be upgraded in case of base station extension.
(3) If there are more than six RRUs in the base station, a new DCDU-11B will be needed.
(4) The power configuration applicable for the scenarios with higher power consumption is also applicable
for the scenarios with lower power consumption.
(5) The circuit breakers with higher capacity is applicable for the scenarios where the circuit breakers with
lower capacity can be used. The circuit breaker capacities are ranked as: 160 A > 2 x 80 A > 2 x 63 A >
100 A > 80 A > 63 A
(6) If the power consumption of transmission equipment is over 350 W, the corresponding minimum
requirement for the circuit breaker will be enhanced by the additional power consumption.
(7) If two external power inputs are supplied, the following requirements must be met:
l The two power inputs must be supplied by the same power cabinet.
l The circuit breakers used for the two power inputs have the same model and specifications.
l The power cables for the two power inputs must have the same cross-sectional area and length.
l When powering on the DBS3900, turn on the two circuit breakers of power input before turning on
the circuit breakers for all the RRUs. When powering off the DBS3900, turn off the circuit breakers
for all the RRUs before turning off the two circuit breakers of power input.

In an outdoor scenario with DC power supply, a heater is required in the TMC series cabinets
for the DBS3900. In this case, one additional AC power input is required. Table 3-10 lists the
recommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Table 3-10 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
for the heater
Power Input Type Requirements for Cross-Sectional Length of Power
Circuit Breakers Area of Power Cable
on Customer Input Cables
Equipment

220 V AC single- 2x5A 2.5 mm2 ≤15 m


phase

110 V AC dual-live-
wire

In an outdoor scenario with +24 V DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with an
APM30H (Ver.B) or an APM30H (Ver.C). Table 3-11 lists the recommended configurations
of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables.

Table 3-11 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
if the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) is configured
Power Supply Requirement for Cross-Sectional Length of the
the Circuit Area of the Power Power Cable
Breaker for Cable
Customer
Equipment

+24 V DC Minimum of 1 x 160 2 x 25 mm2 ≤ 15 m


A and maximum of 2
x 100 A

3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the


OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
This section lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power
cables for the outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), and indoor floor installation
support (IFS06). The configurations are based on the maximum configuration of a DBS3900
and supply power to customer equipment in the cabinet. The maximum configuration indicates
that the DBS3900 is configured with a maximum combination of modules and a maximum
combination of cabinets.
In an AC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 is configured with an OMB or IMB03. Table
3-12 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
in this scenario.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Table 3-12 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if the OMB or
IMB03 is configured with a DBS3900
Power Supply Requirement for Cross-Sectional Length of the
the Circuit Area of the Power Power Cable
Breaker for Cable
Customer
Equipment

220 V AC single- Minimum of 1 x 5 A 2.5 mm2 ≤ 40 m


phase power and maximum of 1 x
10 A
110 V AC dual-live-
wire power

Table 3-13 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power
cables in an indoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with an
DCDU-03B.

Table 3-13 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
in an indoor scenario with DC power supply and DCDU-03B
Power Supply Requirement for Cross-Sectional Length of the
the Circuit Area of the Power Power Cable
Breaker for Cable
Customer
Equipment

–48 V DC Minimum of 1 x 32 A 25 mm2 ≤ 15 m


and maximum of 1 x
80 A (both using the
one-level magnetic
blast breaker)

Table 3-14 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power
cables in an indoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with an
DCDU-11B.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Table 3-14 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
in an indoor scenario with DC power supply and DCDU-11B
Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of
Configuration(1)(2) Requirement for Power Cable the Power
(3) the Circuit Cable
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

l Four to Six RRUs 1 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for one external ≤10 m


(power<300 W) DC power input
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l One to Three 1 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for one external


RRUs DC power input
(power<300 W)
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l Four to Six RRUs 1 x 160 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one


(400 W≤ external DC power input
power<560 W)
2 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for two external
l One BBU
DC power inputs(7)
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l One to Three 1 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for one external


RRUs (400 W≤ DC power input
power<560 W)
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l Four to Six RRUs 1 x 100 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one


(300 W≤ external DC power input
power<400 W)
l One BBU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of


Configuration(1)(2) Requirement for Power Cable the Power
(3) the Circuit Cable
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l Transmission 2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two external
equipment DC power inputs(7)
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l One to Three 1 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for one external


RRUs (300 W≤ DC power input
power<400 W)
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l Three RRUs 1 x 100 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one


(power<300 W) external DC power input
l Three RRUs (300
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two external
W≤power<400
W) DC power inputs(7)
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l Three RRUs 1 x 100 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one


(power<300 W) external DC power input
l Three RRUs (400
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two external
W≤power<560
W) DC power inputs(7)
l One BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

l Three RRUs (300 1 x 160 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one


W≤power<400 external DC power input
W)
l Three RRUs (400
W≤power<560
W)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Maximum Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the Length of


Configuration(1)(2) Requirement for Power Cable the Power
(3) the Circuit Cable
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
l One BBU 2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two external
l Transmission DC power inputs(7)
equipment
(power≤350 W)
(6)

NOTE

(1) If both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs exist in the same base station, the power configuration
for high-power RRUs will apply for the base station.
(2) If possible, it is suggested to configure the base station with the power configuration for maximum
high-power RRUs so as to satisfy all scenarios. If the power configuration has to be in accordance with
actual scenarios, the circuit breaker and power cables need to be upgraded in case of base station extension.
(3) If there are more than six RRUs in the base station, a new DCDU-11B will be needed.
(4) The power configuration applicable for the scenarios with higher power consumption is also applicable
for the scenarios with lower power consumption.
(5) The circuit breakers with higher capacity is applicable for the scenarios where the circuit breakers with
lower capacity can be used. The circuit breaker capacities are ranked as: 160 A > 2 x 80 A > 2 x 63 A >
100 A > 80 A > 63 A
(6) If the power consumption of transmission equipment is over 350 W, the corresponding minimum
requirement for the circuit breaker will be enhanced by the additional power consumption.
(7) If two external power inputs are supplied, the following requirements must be met:
l The two power inputs must be supplied by the same power cabinet.
l The circuit breakers used for the two power inputs have the same model and specifications.
l The power cables for the two power inputs must have the same cross-sectional area and length.
l When powering on the DBS3900, turn on the two circuit breakers of power input before turning on
the circuit breakers for all the RRUs. When powering off the DBS3900, turn off the circuit breakers
for all the RRUs before turning off the two circuit breakers of power input.

3.4 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30 or APM30H


(Ver.A)
This section describes the power distribution schemes for a DBS3900 configured with an APM30
or APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenarios. APM
is short for advanced power module, and APM30H is short for advanced power module with a
heat-exchanger cooler.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Power Distribution Schemes in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC Power Supply Scenarios
In a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, a power distribution unit (PDU) in the
APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) converts AC power to DC power and then distributes the power.

The PDU supplies two AC power inputs and ten DC power inputs.

Figure 3-1and Figure 3-2 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30 in the 220 V
AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-15 lists the specifications of the circuit
breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios.
NOTE
In a scenario with a 220 V AC three-phase power supply, the three AC power inputs do not need to be
connected in series using a short-circuiting strip. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the
same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.

Figure 3-1 Power distribution scheme for an APM30 in a scenario with the 220 V AC single-
phase power supply

Figure 3-2 Power distribution scheme for an APM30 in a scenario with the 110 V AC dual-live-
wire power supply

Figure 3-3and Figure 3-4 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the
220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-15 lists the specifications of the
circuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Figure 3-3 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.A) in a scenario with a 220 V AC
single-phase power supply

Figure 3-4 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.A) in a scenario with a 110 V AC
dual-live-wire power supply

Table 3-15 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
in an AC power supply scenario

Power Supply Specifications of Specifications of Specifications of


Upper-Level AC Output Circuit DC Output Circuit
Circuit Breakers of Breakers Breakers and
the EPU Fuses

220 V AC single- 3 x 16 A (MCB1) l 1 x 10 A for the l 6 x 20 A for the


phase or three-phase heater remote radio unit
power l 1 x 10 A for the (RRU)
heating film l 1 x 12 A for the
baseband unit
(BBU)
l 1 x 12 A for the
FAN

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Power Supply Specifications of Specifications of Specifications of


Upper-Level AC Output Circuit DC Output Circuit
Circuit Breakers of Breakers Breakers and
the EPU Fuses

110 V AC dual-live- 2 x 30 A (MCB) l 2 x 4 A for the


wire power TM2

NOTE

(1) MCB: miniature circuit breaker


(2) TM: transmission device

In the AC power supply scenario, one DC output power is supplied to the transmission cabinet.
The transmission cabinet uses DC power distribution box to supply power to the transmission
device, fan box, and other components in the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in the AC power supply
scenario

Table 3-16 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC
power supply scenario.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Table 3-16 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Power Supply Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers

APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) 220 V AC l 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1 x 6 A


and a transmission cabinet (MCB) for the
transmission device
l 1 x 6 A (MCB) for the
FAN

Power Distribution Scheme in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the external power is supplied to the TMC or the TMC11H
(Ver.A), and the direct current distribution unit (DCDU-03B) supplies DC power to the BBU,
RRU, fan box, and other components in the cabinet.
Figure 3-6 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC or the TMC11H (Ver.A). Table
3-17 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers.

Figure 3-6 Power distribution scheme for the TMC or the TMC11H (Ver.A) in an –48 V DC
power supply scenario

Table 3-17 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) in the –48 V
DC power supply scenario
Cabinet Specifications of DC Output Circuit
Breakers

TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5


l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBU
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission
device

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

3.5 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or


APM30H (Ver.C)
This section describes the power distribution schemes for a DBS3900 configured with an
APM30H (Ver.B) or an APM30H (Ver.C) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, –48 V DC, and +24 V
DC power supply scenarios. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-
exchanger cooler.

Power Distribution Schemes in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC Power Supply Scenarios
In a scenario with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the embedded power supply system
(EPS) and embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in the cabinet converts AC power to DC power
and distributes the DC power.

The EPS or EPU supplies two AC power outputs:


l One provides AC power for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC
power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.

A power supply unit (PSU) converts the AC power to DC power, which is then supplied to the
storage battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU),
and other equipment in the DBS3900.
NOTE

When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to be
connected in series using a short-circuiting bar. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the
same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.

Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) in
the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-18 lists the specifications of the
circuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios.

Figure 3-7 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 220 V AC three-phase
power supply scenario

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Figure 3-8 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire
power supply scenario

Table 3-18 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the AC
power supply scenario
Power Supply Specifications of Specifications of Specifications of
Upper-Level AC Output Circuit DC Output Circuit
Circuit Breakers of Breakers Breakers and
the EPS Fuses

220 V AC single- 3 x 16 A (MCB(1)) l 1 x 16 A (MCB) l 1 x 100 A (MCB)


phase or three-phase for the heater and for the BAT(2)
power SOU l 6 x 20 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-live- 1 x 40 A (MCB) l 1 x 16 A (MCB) for the RRU
wire power for the heater l 1 x 25 A (MCB)
for the TMC
l 1 x 16 A (MCB)
for the SOU l 1 x 15 A (FUSE
(3)) for the FAN

l 2 x 15 A (FUSE)
for the BBU
l 1 x 15 A (FUSE)
for the TEC(4).
TEC is short for
thermoelectric
cooling unit.
l TM(5): 4 x 15 A
(FUSE)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

NOTE

(1) MCB: miniature circuit breaker


(2) BAT: storage battery
(3) FUSE: fuse
(4) TEC: air conditioner
(5) TM: transmission equipment

Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.C) in
the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-19 lists the specifications of the
circuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios.

Figure 3-9 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 220 V AC three-phase
power supply scenario

Figure 3-10 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 110 V AC dual-live-
wire power supply scenario

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Table 3-19 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in the AC
power supply scenario
Power Supply Specifications of Specifications of Specifications of
Upper-Level AC Output Circuit DC Output Circuit
Circuit Breakers of Breakers Breakers and
the EPS Fuses

220 V AC single- 3 x 20 A (MCB) l 1 x 15 A (MCB) l 1 x 160A (MCB)


phase or three-phase for the heater and for the BAT
power SOU l 6 x 25 A (MCB)
for the RRU
110 V AC dual-live- 1 x 63 A (MCB) l 1 x 15 A (MCB)
wire power for the heater l 1 x 30 A (MCB)
for the TMC
l 1 x 15 A (MCB)
for the SOU l 1 x 15 A (FUSE
(3)) for the FAN

l 2 x 25 A (FUSE)
for the BBU
l 1 x 15 A (FUSE)
for the TEC
l 4 x 15 A (FUSE)
for the TM

In the AC power supply scenario, one DC output power is supplied to the transmission cabinet.
The transmission cabinet uses DC power distribution box to supply power to the transmission
device, fan box, and other components in the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in the AC power supply
scenario

Table 3-20 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC
power supply scenario

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Table 3-20 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC power
supply scenario

Cabinet Specifications of DC Output Circuit


Breakers

Transmission cabinet l 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1 x 6 A (MCB) for the


transmission device
l 1 x 6 A (MCB) for the FAN

In the AC power supply scenario, one DC output power is supplied to the transmission cabinet.
The transmission cabinet uses DC power distribution box to supply power to the transmission
device, fan box, and other components in the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in the AC power supply
scenario

Table 3-21 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC
power supply scenario

Table 3-21 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC power
supply scenario

Cabinet Specifications of DC Output Circuit


Breakers

Transmission cabinet l 2 x 6 A (MCB) + 2 x 12 A (MCB) + 4 x


25 A (MCB) for the transmission device
l 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the FAN

Power Distribution Scheme in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 can be configured with a TMC11H (Ver.B).
The direct current distribution unit (DCDU-03B) supplies DC power to the baseband unit (BBU),
remote radio unit (RRU), fan box, and other components.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Figure 3-13 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B). TMC11H is short
for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler. Table 3-22 lists the specifications of the
circuit breakers.

Figure 3-13 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the –48 V DC power supply
scenario

Table 3-22 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the –48 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Specifications of DC Output Circuit
Breakers

TMC11H (Ver.B) l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5


l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBU
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission
device
l 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the FAN

In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 can be configured with a TMC11H (Ver.C).
The DCDU-11B supplies DC power to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components.
Figure 3-14 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 3-23 lists
the specifications of the circuit breakers.

Figure 3-14 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the –48 V DC power supply
scenario

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Table 3-23 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the –48 V DC power
supply scenario

Cabinet Specifications of DC Output Circuit


Breakers

TMC11H (Ver.C) l 6 x 25 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5


l 2 x 25 A (MCB) for the BBU
l 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the transmission
device
l 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the FAN

Power Distribution Scheme in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario


In a +24 V DC power supply scenario, the power system (DC/DC) in the APM30H (Ver.B)
converts the +24 V DC power to –48 V DC power and supplies the power to the DCDU-03B,
which supplies power to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components.

Figure 3-15 shows the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 3-24 lists
the specifications of the circuit breakers.

Figure 3-15 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply
scenario

Table 3-24 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power
supply scenario

Cabinet Specifications of DC Output Circuit


Breakers

Two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5


l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBU
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission
device

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

3.6 Power Distribution Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and


IFS06
This section describes the power distribution schemes for a DBS3900 configured with an outdoor
mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), or an indoor floor installation support (IFS06) in
the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, –48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supply scenarios.

Power Distribution Schemes in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC Power Supply Scenarios
In a scenario with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the power supply equipment in the
cabinet (AC to DC) converts AC power to DC power and distributes the DC power.

Figure 3-16 shows the power distribution schemes for the OMB and IMB03 in the 220 V AC
single-phase and 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenarios. Table 3-25 lists the
specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses.

Figure 3-16 Power distribution schemes in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC power supply scenarios

Table 3-25 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses

Cabinet Power Supply Specifications of DC


Output Circuit Breakers
and Fuses

OMB or IMB03 220 V AC single-phase or l 10 A for the baseband unit


110 V AC dual-live-wire (BBU) & HEUA
power cable l 20 A for the TM
l 20 A for the BAT
l 12 A for the remote radio
unit (RRU)
l 4 A for the TM

Power Distribution Scheme in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the input power is supplied to the cabinet, and the direct
current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) supplies power to the baseband unit (BBU), remote
radio unit (RRU), and other components in the DBS3900.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Figure 3-17 shows the power distribution scheme for the OMB or the IMB03 in a –48 V DC
power supply scenario. Table 3-26 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in
the DBS3900 in the scenarios.

Figure 3-17 Power distribution scheme for the OMB or IMB03 in a –48 V DC power supply
scenario

Table 3-26 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses


Cabinet Power Supply Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
and Fuses

OMB or IMB03 –48 V DC l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU


0 to RRU 5
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the
BBU
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the
transmission device
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the
FAN

Power Distribution Scheme in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario


In a +24 V DC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 is configured with an IMB03 and an IFS06.
The power supply system (DC to DC) in the IMB03 converts the +24 V DC power to –48 V DC
power and supplies power to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B supplies power to the BBU and
RRU.
Figure 3-18 shows the power distribution scheme for the IMB03. Table 3-27 lists the
specifications of the circuit breakers.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System

Figure 3-18 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply
scenario

Table 3-27 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Power Supply Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers

One IMB03 and one IFS06 +24 V DC l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU


0 to RRU 5
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the
BBU
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the
transmission device

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

About This Chapter

The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the
cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and
UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to
achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.
4.1 BBU Monitoring Port
The BBU houses the UPEU and UEIU for monitoring. Each board has two Boolean input ports
and two RS485 input ports, and each Boolean input port receives four Boolean inputs.
4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
The advanced power module (APM30) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet are monitored
by various boards. The boards manage the cabinet by collecting alarms from components such
as sensors and fans and by using the RS485 serial bus to transmit the alarm signals to the MON
port on the baseband unit (BBU). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-
exchanger cooler.
4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
The APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet are monitored by various
boards. The boards manage the cabinets by collecting alarms from components such as sensors
and fans and then using the RS485 serial bus to transmit alarm signals to MON ports on the
baseband unit (BBU).
4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
The outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), and the indoor floor installation support
(IFS06) are monitored by different boards. The boards or modules report the alarms from
components such as sensors and fans to the baseband unit (BBU).
4.5 Customized Alarm Input
When an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to the
BBU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

4.1 BBU Monitoring Port


The BBU houses the UPEU and UEIU for monitoring. Each board has two Boolean input ports
and two RS485 input ports, and each Boolean input port receives four Boolean inputs.

Figure 4-1 shows the slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU.

Figure 4-1 Slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU

Table 4-1 lists the ports on the UPEU and UEIU.

Table 4-1 Ports on the UPEU and UEIU

Slot Board Port Connector Quantity Description

Slot19 UPEU EXT-ALM0 RJ45 1 Port for


connector Boolean
inputs 0 to 3

EXT-ALM1 RJ45 1 Port for


connector Boolean
inputs 4 to 7

MON0 RJ45 1 Port for


connector RS485 input
0

MON1 RJ45 1 Port for


connector RS485 input
1

Slot18 UEIU EXT-ALM0 RJ45 1 Port for


(optional) connector Boolean
inputs 0 to 3

EXT-ALM1 RJ45 1 Port for


connector Boolean
inputs 4 to 7

MON0 RJ45 1 Port for


connector RS485 input
0

MON1 RJ45 1 Port for


connector RS485 input
1

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)


The advanced power module (APM30) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet are monitored
by various boards. The boards manage the cabinet by collecting alarms from components such
as sensors and fans and by using the RS485 serial bus to transmit the alarm signals to the MON
port on the baseband unit (BBU). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-
exchanger cooler.

Monitoring Schemes of the DBS3900 in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply


Scenario
NOTE
If a DBS3900 is configured with an APM30 or an APM30H (Ver.A), the DBS3900 can work only in a
single-mode or dual-mode scenario.

Figure 4-2 shows the monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 when the BBU is configured in an
APM30 and the DBS3900 is configured with one APM30, one transmission cabinet with heat-
exchanger cooler (TMC), and one backup battery cabinet (BBC) or with APM30s, one TMC,
and two BBCs. For details about the equipment monitored by the APM power monitor unit
interface board (APMI) and APM fan monitor unit interface board (AFMU), see descriptions of
the APMI and AFMU.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the AFMU, see AFMU.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power monitoring unit (PMU),
see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30.

Figure 4-2 Monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
APM30 APM30 APM30

COM_IN / COM1
APMI APMI APMI
COM_OUT / COM2
ALM0/ALM1 PMU AFMU PMU AFMU PMU AFMU
MON0 / MON1
TX RX
RS232/RS422
Cable to be BBU BBU
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
TMC BBC TMC BBC BBC
Door Status Door Status Door Status
APMI APMI
Sensor Sensor Sensor

AFMU AFMU
Wiring terminal Wiring terminal
for the surge for the surge
protection alarm protection alarm
signal cable on signal cable on
the DCDU the DCDU

Door Status Door Status


Sensor Sensor

Figure 4-3 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is configured in an
APM30H (Ver.A) and the DBS3900 is configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC
(Ver.A), and one BBC or one integrated battery backup system (IBBS) or with two APM30Hs,
one TMC, and two BBCs or two IBBSs. For details about the equipment monitored by the heat
exchange unit type A (HEUA) and HERT power monitoring interface unit (HPMI), see
descriptions of the boards. HERT refers to the Huawei Enhanced Radio Technology.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is
configured only in the APM30H (Ver.A).

Figure 4-3 Monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.A)
BAT APM30H(Ver.A) APM30H(Ver.A) APM30H(Ver.A)
COM
COM_IN / COM1 HPMI HPMI HPMI

COM_OUT / COM2
PMU HEUA PMU HEUA PMU HEUA
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
RS232/RS422
Cable to be BBU BBU
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
TMC11H(Ver.A) BBC/IBBS TMC11H(Ver.A) BBC/IBBS BBC/IBBS

Door status Door status Door status


HEUA sensor HEUA sensor
sensor

Monitoring Schemes of the DBS3900 in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


Figure 4-4 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in one TMC
or a TMC11H (Ver.A) and the DBS3900 is configured with two TMCs or two TMC11Hs
(Ver.A). TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler version A.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the central monitoring unit type A
(CMUA), see CMUA.

Figure 4-4 Monitoring schemes of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the TMC or
TMC11H (Ver.A)
TMC/TMC11H TMC/TMC11H

COM_IN / COM1
APMI/HEUA/CMUA APMI/HEUA/CMUA
MON0 / MON1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery BBU
Monitoring from
source to destination

4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H


(Ver.C)
The APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet are monitored by various
boards. The boards manage the cabinets by collecting alarms from components such as sensors
and fans and then using the RS485 serial bus to transmit alarm signals to MON ports on the
baseband unit (BBU).

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Monitoring Scheme of a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Base Station


Only one BBU is configured in a single-mode or dual-mode base station and the BBU is installed
in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). If two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C)
are configured, the BBU is installed in the basic APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C), which
is on the left.
The central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) is configured in the APM30H (Ver.B) and the
central monitoring unit type E (CMUE) is configured in the APM30H (Ver.C). The monitoring
schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are the same. For details of the
equipment monitored by the CMUA, CMUE, and the HERT power monitoring interface unit
(HPMI), see the descriptions of CMUA, CMUE, and HPMI. HERT is short for Huawei Enhanced
Radio Technology.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUE, see CMUE.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is
configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B).
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see
Power Subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 4-5 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B)
or APM30H (Ver.C) housing the BBU, one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), and one
IBBS or with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H
(Ver.C), and two IBBSs.

Figure 4-5 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H
(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
COM_IN / COM1
HPMI HPMI HPMI
COM_OUT / COM2
COM_485
PMU CMUA/CMUE PMU CMUA/CMUE PMU CMUA/CMUE
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
COM
Cable to be
BBU BBU
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) IBBS TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) IBBS IBBS

CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE

Figure 4-6 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B)
or APM30H (Ver.C) housing the BBU, one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), and two
IBBSs or with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H
(Ver.C), and four IBBSs.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Figure 4-6 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B) or
APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and two IBBSs
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)

COM_IN / COM1
CMUA/CMUE HPMI CMUA/CMUE HPMI HPMI
COM_OUT / COM2
PMU CMUA/CMUE PMU CMUA/CMUE PMU CMUA/CMUE COM_485
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
COM
BBU BBU Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
IBBS IBBS IBBS IBBS IBBS IBBS

CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE

Figure 4-7 shows the monitoring schemes of the DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) that only supplies power to and monitor RRUs.

Figure 4-7 Monitoring schemes of the DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B) or
APM30H (Ver.C) that only supplies power to and monitor RRUs

Figure 4-8 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11H (Ver.B)
or TMC11H (Ver.C) housing the BBU.

Figure 4-8 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11H (Ver.B) or
TMC11H (Ver.C) housing the BBU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Figure 4-9 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a +24 V
DC APM30H (Ver.B).

Figure 4-9 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the +24 V DC
APM30H (Ver.B)
COM_IN APM30H(+24V,Ver.B)

ALM
CMUA
PRESENT
MON0 / MON1
EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1 Power System
Cable to be (DC/DC)
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery BBU
Monitoring from
source to destination

Monitoring Scheme of a Triple-Mode Base Station


In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured. The basic BBU is BBU0 and is configured
in 0# APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) on the left. The extension BBU is BBU1 and is
configured in 1# APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) on the right. All the monitoring
equipment is connected to BBU0 instead of BBU1, which is the same as in a single-mode or
dual-mode scenario, as shown in Figure 4-10, Figure 4-11, and Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-10 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or
APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and two IBBSs

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Figure 4-11 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or
APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and four IBBSs

Figure 4-12 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with the TMC11H (Ver.B)
orTMC11H (Ver.C)

4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06


The outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), and the indoor floor installation support
(IFS06) are monitored by different boards. The boards or modules report the alarms from
components such as sensors and fans to the baseband unit (BBU).

Monitoring Scheme of a DBS3900 in a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Scenario


NOTE
For details about the equipment monitored, see descriptions of the monitoring boards or modules.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the heat exchange unit type A (HEUA), see
HEUA.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power monitoring unit (PMU), see PMU.
The PMU is configured only in the lower IMB03.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power system (DC/DC), see Power Subrack
(DC/DC).

Figure 4-13 shows the monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an
OMB in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 4-14 shows the monitoring

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an OMB in a –48 V DC power supply
scenario.

Figure 4-13 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an OMB in a 110
V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario

Figure 4-14 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an OMB in a 110
V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario

Figure 4-15 shows the monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 configured with the BBU, remote
radio units (RRUs), and IMB03 in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. In this
scenario, the BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed remotely.

Figure 4-15 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and IMB03
in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
IMB03

RS232/RS485
MON0 / MON1 BBU
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery PMU
Monitoring from
source to destination

If the DBS3900 is configured with the BBU, RRUs, and indoor centralized rack (ICR), the BBU
is installed in the IMB03, and the RRU is installed on the IFS06. Figure 4-16 shows the
monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in the 110 V AC
or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 4-17 shows the monitoring scheme of the DBS3900
configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in the +24 V DC power supply scenario.

Figure 4-16 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in
the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
IMB03

COM_IN / COM1
BBU
MON0 / MON1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected IMB03
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination PMU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Figure 4-17 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in
the +24 V DC power supply scenario
IMB03
ALM
PRESENT
BBU
EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected IMB03
before delivery
Monitoring from Power System
source to destination (DC/DC)

Monitoring Scheme of the DBS3900 in a Triple-Mode Scenario


NOTE
If the DBS3900 is configured with the OMB or with the BBU, RRUs, and IMB03, the DBS3900 does not
work in triple mode. If the DBS3900 is configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR, the DBS3900 can work
in triple mode.

In triple mode, if the DBS3900 is configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR, two BBUs are
required. BBU0 is configured in 0#IMB03 and BBU1 is configured in 3#IMB03. BBU0 monitors
equipment in 0#IMB03 and 1#IMB03 and BBU1 monitors equipment in 2#IMB03 and
3#IMB03, as shown in Figure 4-18 and Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-18 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in
the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario

Figure 4-19 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in
the –48 V DC power supply scenario

4.5 Customized Alarm Input


When an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to the
BBU.

Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods:
l The alarms are collected by the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

l The alarms are collected by the EMUA. For details about software configurations, see the
related initial configuration guide.

Monitoring Board Configuration


If a BBU monitors customer devices, customized alarms about the devices must be reported to
the BBU. The configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900 depend on the number of
customized alarms, as listed in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900


External Power Application Number of Monitoring Board
Input Scenario Boolean Signals to Configuration
be Monitored

-48 V DC/220 V AC Indoor DBS3900 None UPEU

1 to 16 UPEU+UEIU

17 to 32 UPEU+UEIU
+EMUA

Outdoor DBS3900 None UPEU

1 to 16 UPEU+UEIU
+(2xUSLP2+SLPU)

17 to 32 UPEU+UEIU
+EMUA

NOTE

l If backup power is required for the BBU, two UPEUs rather than UPEU+UEIU are configured.
l The analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA.
l Two USLP2s and one SLPU are delivered in a package.
l The EMUA with sensors is configured according to site requirements for the indoor DBS3900.

Customized Alarms Collected by the UPEU or UEIU


Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A maximum of two
UPEUs or UPEU+UEIU can be configured for the BBU, which means there are 16 Boolean
alarm inputs. This method can be used for the configuration of less than 16 customized alarm
inputs.
If using this method, connect the device to be monitored to the SLPU for surge protection, and
then connect the device to the EXT_ALM port on the BBU, as shown in Figure 4-20.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Figure 4-20 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU

Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPU
and then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU or EUIU through the alarm cable for
the BBU. Table 4-3 describes the relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports and the number of
customized alarms.

Table 4-3 Relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 and the number of
customized alarms

Pins of USLP2 in the upper slot USLP2 in the lower slot


the
IN0 to IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3
IN3
ports

1 4+ 5+ 0+ 1+ 12+ 13+ 8+ 9+

2 4- 5- 0- 1- 12- 13- 8- 9-
(GND) (GND) (GND) (GND) (GND) (GND) (GND) (GND)

3 6- 7+ 2- 3+ 14- 15+ 10- 11+


(GND) (GND) (GND) (GND)

4 6+ 7- 2+ 3- 14+ 15- 10+ 11-


(GND) (GND) (GND) (GND)

For details about ports on the USLP2, see 8.8.5 USLP2. For details about the wire sequence of
the BBU alarm cable, see 7.20 BBU Alarm Cable.

NOTE
The SLPU is configured with two USLP2s by default before delivery when it is used as an alarm signal
protection unit. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot.
In this case, the USLP2 in the upper slot of the SLPU is not used.

Customized Alarms Collected by the EMUA


The EMUA can be configured for the DBS3900 that requires more than 16 Boolean alarm
signals. Each EMUA supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMU
reports the alarms to the CMUA, which transfers the alarms to the BBU through the MON port.
For details about cable connections, see Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (1)

SENSOR

Customized alarms are collected by the EMUA, transferred by the PMU, and then reported to
the CMUA. Finally, the alarms are transferred to the RRU through the MON port, achieving
alarm monitoring on the RRU. For detailed cable connections, see Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (2)

RRU
ALM

COM_OUT COM_IN

COM_IN COM_OUT
CMUA
PMU

EMUA
RS485
SENSOR

For details about the position of the input port on the EMUA and cable connection between the
EMUA and the sensor, see EMUA User Guide.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

5 BBU3900 Equipment

About This Chapter

This describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels,
module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications.
The BBU3900 has the following functions:
l Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC/RNC
l Provides CPRI ports for the communication with the RF modules
l Provides USB ports, which facilitates automatic base station upgrade by allowing a USB
disk to be used for software installation and data configuration
l Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000
l Processes uplink and downlink data
l Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing
l Provides the system clock
5.1 Exterior of the BBU3900
The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.
5.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900
This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles,
functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

5.1 Exterior of the BBU3900


The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.
The dimensions (W x D x H) of the BBU3900 are 442 mm x 310 mm x 86 mm. Figure 5-1
shows the BBU3900.

Figure 5-1 BBU3900

The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is unique to a network element (NE) for identification, and
is used during the commissioning of the base station.
l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a label and the mounting
ears of the BBU. Figure 5-2 shows the position of the ESN.

Figure 5-2 The position of the ESN (1)

l If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the mounting ears
of the BBU. Figure 5-3 shows the position of the ESN.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-3 The position of the ESN (2)

5.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900


This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles,
functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.

5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900


This section describes slot assignment of the BBU3900 in the GSM Only (hereinafter referred
to as GO), UMTS Only (hereinafter referred to as UO), LTE Only (hereinafter referred to as
LO), GSM+UMTS (hereinafter referred to as GU), GSM+LTE (hereinafter referred to as GL),
UMTS+LTE (hereinafter referred to as UL), (GSM+UMTS)+(LTE Only) (hereinafter referred
to as GU+LO), (GSM+LTE)+(UMTS Only) (hereinafter referred to as GL+UO) scenarios.

Slots of the BBU3900


The slot assignment of the BBU3900 in GO mode, BBU3900 in GU mode, BBU3900 in UO
mode, BBU3900 in LO mode, BBU3900 in GL mode, BBU3900 in UL mode, BBU3900 in GU
+LO mode, and BBU3900 in GL+UO mode are the same, as shown in Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 Slots of the BBU3900

BBU3900 Working in GO Mode


Table 5-1 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GO
mode.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-1 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GO mode
Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks
Mandatory Quantity Slot

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured


only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured


only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU


is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
The 1 U GPS/
GLONASS
receiver is
configured in
slot 1 (with slots
0 and 1
occupied).

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

Figure 5-5 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GO mode.

Figure 5-5 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GO mode

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Working in UO Mode


Table 5-2 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UO
mode.

Table 5-2 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UO mode
Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks
Mandatory Quantity Slot

WMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single WMPT


is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks


Mandatory Quantity Slot

WBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 It is configured


in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
preferentiall
y configured
in slot 3 or 2
in
descending
order of
priority.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
preferentiall
y configured
in slot 3, 0, 1,
2, 4, or 5 in
descending
order of
priority.
If a WBBPd is
required, it is
preferentially
configured in
slot 3 or 2 in
descending
order of priority.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that two WBBPs
are installed in
slots 2 and 3. At
least, one of the
two WBBPs is
WBBPd.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured


only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU


is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks


Mandatory Quantity Slot

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 4 Slots 0, 1, 4, and It is


5 preferentially
configured in
slot 4, 5, 0, or 1
in descending
order of priority.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 1 or 0 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
The 1 U GPS/
GLONASS
receiver is
configured in
slot 1 (with slots
0 and 1
occupied).

Figure 5-6 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in UMTS Only mode.

Figure 5-6 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in UO mode

BBU3900 Working in LO Mode


Table 5-3 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in LO
mode.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-3 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in LO mode
Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks
Mandatory Quantity Slot

LMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single LMPT


is configured in
slot 7.

LBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 A single LBBP


is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
The priorities of
slot assignment
are as follows:
slot 3, slot 2, slot
1, slot 0, slot 4,
slot 5.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured


only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU


is configured
only in slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5 A single USCU


is preferentially
configured in
slot 5. A USCU
that occupies 1
U space is
configured in
slots 5 and 4.
If slots 4 and 5
are occupied, a
single USCU is
configured in
slot 1. In this
situation, a
USCU that
occupies 1 U
space is
configured in
slots 1 and 0.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-7 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in LO mode.

Figure 5-7 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in LO mode

BBU3900 Working in GU Mode


Table 5-4 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GU
mode.

Table 5-4 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GU mode
Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks
Mandatory Quantity Slot

WMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configured


only in slot 7.

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured


only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks


Mandatory Quantity Slot

WBBP Mandatory 5 Slots 0 to 4 It is configured


in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
preferentiall
y configured
in slot 3 or 2
in
descending
order of
priority.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
preferentiall
y configured
in slot 3, 2, 0,
1, or 4 in
descending
order of
priority.
If a WBBPd is
required, it is
preferentially
configured in
slot 3 or 2 in
descending
order of priority.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that two WBBPs
are installed in
slots 2 and 3. At
least, one of the
two WBBPs is
WBBPd.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured


only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU


is configured
only in slot 19.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks


Mandatory Quantity Slot

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0 or 4 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The slot priority
of the GO UTRP
is higher than
that of the UO
UTRP.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

Figure 5-8 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GU mode.

Figure 5-8 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GU mode

BBU3900 Working in GL Mode


Table 5-5 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GL
mode.

Table 5-5 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GL mode

Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks


Mandatory Quantity Slot

LMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configured


only in slot 7.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks


Mandatory Quantity Slot

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured


only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).

LBBP Mandatory 5 Slots 0 to 4 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
The priorities of
slot assignment
are as follows:
slot 3, slot 2, slot
1, slot 0, slot 4

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured


only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU


is configured
only in slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0 or 4 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 4, 0, or 1 in
descending
order of priority.
The slot priority
of the GO UTRP
is higher than
that of the LO
UTRP.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
The 1 U GPS/
GLONASS
receiver is
configured in
slot 1 (with slots
0 and 1
occupied).

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-9 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GL mode.

Figure 5-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 working in GL mode

BBU3900 Working in UL Mode


Table 5-6 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UL
mode.

Table 5-6 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UL mode
Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks
Mandatory Quantity Slot

LMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 It is configured


only in slot 6.

WMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configured


only in slot 7.

LBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or A single LBBP


5 is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
preferentially
configured in
slot 2, 0, 1, 4, or
5 in descending
order of priority.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Board Optional/ Maximum Installation Remarks


Mandatory Quantity Slot

WBBP Mandatory 4 Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or A single WBBP


5 is configured
only in slot 3. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
WBBP is
preferentially
configured in
slot 3, 0, 1, 4, or
5 in descending
order of priority.
If a WBBPd is
required, it is
configured only
in slot 3.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configured


only in slot 16.

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEU


is configured
only in slot 19.

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 4 or 5 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The slot priority
of the UO UTRP
is higher than
that of the LO
UTRP.

USCU Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It is


preferentially
configured in
slot 4.

Figure 5-10 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in UL mode.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 working in UL mode

BBU3900 Working in GU+LO Mode


BBU3900 Working in GU Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in the
BBU3900 working in GU mode.

BBU3900 Working in LO Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in the
BBU3900 working in LO mode.

BBU3900 Working in GL+UO Mode


BBU3900 Working in GL Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in the
BBU3900 working in GL mode.

BBU3900 Working in UO Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in the
BBU3900 working in UO mode.

5.2.2 WMPT
The WCDMA Main Processes and Transmission unit (WMPT) of the BBU3900 processes the
signals and manages the resources for other boards.

Panel
Figure 5-11 shows the panel of the WMPT.

Figure 5-11 Panel of the WMPT

Functions
The WMPT has the following functions:

l Provides Operation and Maintenance (OM) functions such as configuration management,


equipment management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active/
standby switchover and provides OM channels connected to the OMC (LMT or M2000)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

l Provides the reference clock


l Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900
l Provides USB ports, one of which facilitates automatic base station upgraded when a USB
disk is inserted during software installation and data configuration
l Provides four E1s/T1s which support ATM and IP protocols
l Provides one FE electrical port and one FE optical port which support the IP protocol

LEDs
Table 5-7 describes the LEDs on the WMPT panel.

Table 5-7 LEDs on the WMPT panel


Label Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON The power input is


available, but the
board is faulty.

OFF The power supply is


unavailable.

1s ON and 1s OFF The board in normal


configuration is
running properly.

0.125s ON and The software is being


0.125s OFF loaded to the board,
or the board is not in
use.

ALM Red OFF No alarm is


generated.

ON The board has alarms


on hardware.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in


standby mode.

In addition to the previous three LEDs, the WMPT has another six LEDs indicating the
connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and the commissioning Ethernet port.
The six LEDs have no silk screen and are on both sides of each of the three ports. Figure 5-12
shows the LEDs beside the three ports.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-12 LEDs beside the three ports on the WMPT

Table 5-8 describes the LEDs and their status.

Table 5-8 LEDs and their status

LED Color Status Meaning

LEDs beside the FE1 Green (LINK) ON The connections are


optical port functional.

OFF The connections are


faulty.

Green (ACT) Blinking Data transmission is


ongoing.

OFF No data transmission


is ongoing.

LEDs beside the FE0 Green (LINK) ON The connections are


electrical port functional.

OFF The connections are


faulty.

Yellow (ACT) Blinking Data transmission is


ongoing.

OFF No data transmission


is ongoing.

ETH Green (LINK) ON The connections are


functional.

OFF The connections are


faulty.

Yellow (ACT) Blinking Data transmission is


ongoing.

OFF No data transmission


is ongoing.

Ports
Table 5-9 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-9 Ports on the WMPT panel


Label Connector Type Description

E1/T1 DB26 connector E1/T1 port

FE0 RJ45 connector FE electrical port

FE1 SFP connector FE optical port

GPS SMA connector Obligate

ETH RJ45 connector Commissioning Ethernet


port

USB USB connector USB loading port

TST USB connector USB testing port

RST - Resetting the BBU

DIP Switches
The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 for setting the E1/T1 working mode and SW2 for setting
the protection grounding for the E1/T1 cables receiving 4-way signals. Figure 5-13 shows the
DIP switches on the WMPT.

Figure 5-13 DIP switches on the WMPT

Table 5-10 and Table 5-11 describe the settings of SW1 and SW2.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-10 Settings of SW1

DIP DIP Status Description


Switch
1 2 3 4

SW1 ON ON OFF OFF T1 Mode

OFF OFF ON ON The E1


impedance is
set to 120
ohms.

ON ON ON ON The E1
impedance is
set to 75
ohms.

Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled

Table 5-11 Settings of SW2

DIP DIP Status Description


Switch
1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced


Mode

ON ON ON ON Unbalanced
Mode

Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled

CAUTION
All the DIP bits of SW2 are set to OFF by default. When four E1 links are faulty, you should
set all the DIP bits of SW2 to ON so that the faults are rectified.

5.2.3 GTMU
The GSM Transmission & Timing & Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) is the basic
transmission and control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance
port, and external alarm collection port, monitors the power supply, and controls and manages
the entire base station.

Panel
The GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15
show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-14 GTMU panel

Figure 5-15 GTMUb panel

Functions
The GTMU and GTMUb have the following functions:

l Controls and manages the base station


l Supports fault management system, configuration management system, performance
management system, and security management system
l Monitors the fans and power modules
l Provides and manages the clock source of the base station in centralized mode
l Provides the clock output for test
l Provides the FE port for maintenance on the OM system
l Supports transmission through four E1s and two FEs
l Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs
l The GTMUb supports interconnected BBUs.

LEDs
Table 5-12 describes the LEDs on the GTMU.

Table 5-12 LEDs on the GTMU

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON The board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

LED Color Status Description

ON for 1s and OFF The board is running properly.


for 1s

ON for 2s and OFF The board is being tested.


for 2s

ON for 0.125s and Software is being loaded to the


OFF for 0.125s board.

ALM Red ON An alarm is generated,


indicating a running fault.

OFF The board is running properly.

ACT Green ON The board is in the active state.

OFF The board is in the standby state.

Besides the preceding three LEDs, there are LEDs indicating the connection status of the FE
optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port and commissioning port. Each of the LEDs is
positioned near the relevant port without any label on the panel of the board. Table 5-13 describes
the LEDs and their status.

Table 5-13 LEDs and their status


LED Color Status Description

LIU0 to LIU3 Green ON The link is in the idle


state.

ON for 0.125s and An E1/T1 remote


OFF for 0.125s alarm is generated.

OFF The link is


functional.

CPRI0 to CPRI5 Green ON The CPRI link is


functional.

Red ON The optical module


fails to receive
signals.

ETH Green (LINK LED ON The connection is set


on the left) up successfully.

OFF No connection is set


up.

Orange (ACT LED Blinking Data is being


on the right) transmitted.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

LED Color Status Description

OFF No data is being


transmitted.

FE0 Green (LINK LED ON The connection is set


on the left) up successfully.

OFF No connection is set


up.

Orange (ACT LED Blinking Data is being


on the right) transmitted.

OFF No data is being


transmitted.

FE1(GTMUb) Green (LINK LED ON The connection is set


on the left) up successfully.

OFF No connection is set


up.

Green (ACT LED on Blinking Data is being


the right) transmitted.

OFF No data is being


transmitted.

M_S (GTMUb) - - This is the LED of the


reserved port.

EXT (GTMUb) - - This is the LED of the


reserved port.

Ports
Table 5-14 describes the ports on the GTMU.

Table 5-14 Ports on the GTMU


Label Connector Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female Data transmission port interconnected to the RFU.
It supports the input and output of optical and
electrical transmission signals

EXT (GTMUb) SFP female Obligate

ETH RJ45 connector Local maintenance and debugging port

FE0 RJ45 connector Connected to the routers in the equipment room


through FE cables to transmit network
information

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Label Connector Description

FE1 DLC connector Connected to the routers in the equipment room


through optical cables to transmit network
information

USB USB connector Used for automatic software upgrade through the
USB disk

TST USB connector Provides a reference clock for the tester

E1/T1 DB26 female Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs between
connector the GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs

The RST button on the panel of the GTMU is used for resetting the board.

DIP Switches
On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 and
S2 must be set together. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:

l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 5-15 provides details on the DIP switch.
l S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 cables. Table 5-16 provides details on
the DIP switch.
l S3 is reserved.
l S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 5-17 provides details on the DIP switch.
l S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 5-18 provides details
on the DIP switch.

Table 5-15 Details of the DIP Switch S1

DIP Bit Status Description


Switch
1 2 3 4

S1 ON ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to


75 ohm.

OFF ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to


120 ohm.

ON OFF OFF OFF The T1 resistance is set to


100 ohm.

Others Unavailable

NOTE

Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept as out-of-factory state, without any manual setting on site. The out-of-
factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-16 Details of the DIP Switch S2


DIP Bit Status Description
Switch
1 2 3 4

S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF By default, all the DIP


bits of S2 are set to OFF
in all the modes.

ON ON ON ON When the four E1 RX


links in 75 ohm have
errors, all the bits of S2
must be set to ON to
rectify the faults on the
E1 links.

Others Unavailable

Table 5-17 Details of the DIP Switch S4


DIP Bit Status Description
Switch
1 2 3 4

S4 ON ON ON ON Supporting E1 bypass

OFF OFF OFF OFF Not supporting E1


bypass

Others Unavailable

Table 5-18 Details of the DIP Switch S5


DIP Bit Status Description
Switch
1 2 3 4

S5 ON ON ON ON Not supporting E1
bypass

OFF ON ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass


of level-1 cascaded
base stations

ON OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass


of level-2 cascaded
base stations

OFF OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass


of level-3 cascaded
base stations

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

DIP Bit Status Description


Switch
1 2 3 4

ON ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypass


of level-4 cascaded
base stations

OFF ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypass


of level-5 cascaded
base stations

5.2.4 LMPT
The LTE Main Processing & Transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system in
terms of OM and signaling processing and provides the clock for the BBU3900.

Panel
Figure 5-16 shows the LMPT.

Figure 5-16 LMPT

LMPT TX RX TX RX RUN
ALM
ACT
GPS
LMPTb SFP 0 SFP 1 USB TST ETH FE/GE0 FE/GE1 RST

Functions
The LMPT has the following functions:
l Enabling configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,
signaling processing, and radio source management
l Enabling control for the boards in the system
l Providing the system clock
l Enabling signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW

LEDs
There are three LEDs on the panel of the LMPT. Table 5-19 describes the LEDs on the LMPT.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-19 LEDs on the panel of the LMPT


Label Color Status Description

RUN Green On The board is powered on but


it is faulty.

Off There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

Blinking (on for Data is being loaded to the


1s and off for 1s) board, the board is not
started, or the board is
running in a secure version.

Blinking (on for The board is being loaded,


0.125s and off for the board is not started, or
0.125s) the board is running
properly.

ALM Red On An alarm is reported,


indicating a fault in the
board.

Off The board is working


properly.

Blinking (on for An alarm is generated, and


1s and off for 1s) the alarm may be caused by
an associated board or port
fault. Therefore, you must
locate the fault before
replacing the board.

ACT Green On The board works in active


mode.

Off The board works in standby


mode.

Blinking (on for The OML link is disrupted.


0.125s and off for
0.125s)

Blinking (on for The board is being tested,


1s and off for 1s) such as an RRU Voltage
Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) test through a
USB disk. When an
upgrade through a USB
disk is implemented, the
ACT LED does not blink.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Besides the preceding three LEDs, some other LEDs used for indicating the connection status
of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, commissioning Ethernet port have no silkscreen on the
board. They are near the ports. Table 5-20 describes the LEDs.

Table 5-20 Ports and LEDs


Label Color Status Description

SFP0 and SFP1 Green (LINK) On The connection is set


up successfully.

Off No connection is set


up.

Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is being


transmitted.

Off No data is being


transmitted.

ETH Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is being


transmitted.

Off No data is being


transmitted.

Green (LINK) On The connection is set


up successfully.

Off No connection is set


up.

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 Green (LINK) On The connection is set


up successfully.

Off No connection is set


up.

Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is being


transmitted.

Off No data is being


transmitted.

Port
Table 5-21 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-21 Ports on the panel of the LMPT


Label Connector Type Quantity Application

SFP0 and SFP1 LC 2 FE/GE optical port,


used for connecting
transmission
equipment or gateway
equipment

USB USB 1 Software loading

TST USB 1 Testing

ETH RJ45 connector 1 Commissioning

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 RJ45 connector 2 FE/GE electrical port,


used for connecting
transmission
equipment or gateway
equipment

GPS SMA 1 Receiving GPS signals

RST - 1 Resetting the


BBU3900

NOTE

SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input or output. Therefore, they are not used
simultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they are not used
simultaneously.

5.2.5 WBBP
The WCDMA Baseband Process Unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

Panel
The WBBP has three types of panels, as shown in Figure 5-17, Figure 5-18, and Figure 5-19.

Figure 5-17 Panel of the WBBPa

Figure 5-18 Panel of the WBBPb

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-19 Panel of the WBBPd

Function
The WBBP has the following functions:
l Provides the CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RF module, and
supports the CPRI interface in 1+1 backup mode.
l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
l The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.
l The WBBPd supports the IC function of uplink data when installed in slot 2 or slot 3.

Table 5-22 describes the specifications of the WBBP.


NOTE
The baseband board in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.

Table 5-22 Specifications of the WBBP

Board Number of Number of UL Number of DL Baseband


Cells CEs CEs Transfer
Capacity

WBBPa 3 128 256 N/A

WBBPb1 3 64 64 Twelve 1T2R


cells

WBBPb2 3 128 128 Twelve 1T2R


cells

WBBPb3 6 256 256 Twelve 1T2R


cells

WBBPb4 6 384 384 Twelve 1T2R


cells

WBBPd1 6 192 192 Twenty-four


1T2R cells

WBBPd2 6 384 384 Twenty-four


1T2R cells

WBBPd3 6 256 256 Twenty-four


1T2R cells

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

LED
There are three LEDs on the panel of the WBBP. Table 5-23 describes the LEDs on the WBBP
and their status.

Table 5-23 LEDs on the panel of the WBBP and their status

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

Off There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

Blinking (on for 1s and off for The board is running properly.
1s)

On for 0.125s and off for Software is being loaded to the


0.125s board.

ACT Green On The board is running.

Off The board is not in use.

ALM Red Off The board is running properly.

On The board has a hardware alarm.

The WBBPa and the WBBPb both provide three LEDs indicating the status of the Small Form-
factor Pluggable (SFP) links, which are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd provides six LEDs
indicating the status of the SFP links, which are above the SFP ports.

Table 5-24 describes the LEDs.

Table 5-24 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links

Label Color Status Description

TX RX Red/green Off No cable is


connected to the
optical module, or
the optical module is
powered off.

Steady green The CPRI link is


functional, and the
RF module has no
hardware faulty.

Steady red The optical module is


not in position, or the
CPRI link is faulty.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Label Color Status Description

Blinking red (on for The RF module on


0.125s and off for the CPRI link has a
0.125s) hardware fault, and
the RF module needs
to be replaced.

Blinking red (on for A VSWR alarm,


1s and off for 1s) antenna alarm, or
external alarm is
generated on the RF
unit on the CPRI link.

Ports
Table 5-25 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb.

Table 5-25 Ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb


Label Connector Type Description

CPRIx SFP female Data transmission port


interconnected to the RF
module. It supports the input
and output of optical and
electrical transmission
signals.

Table 5-26 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.

Table 5-26 Ports on the panel of the WBBPd


Label Connector Type Description

CPRI0, CPRI1, SFP female Data transmission port


CPRI2, CPRI3/ interconnected to the RF module.
EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1, It supports the input and output of
CPRI5/EIH2 optical and electrical
transmission signals.

5.2.6 LBBP
The LTE BaseBand Processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes the baseband signals.

Panel
The LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 5-20 and Figure 5-21.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-20 Panel of the LBBPb


LBBP TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX RUN
ALM
ACT

LBBPb CPRI 0 CPRI 1 CPRI 2 CPRI 3 CPRI 4 CPRI 5

Figure 5-21 Panel of the LBBPc


LBBP TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX RUN
ALM
ACT

LBBPc CPRI 0 CPRI 1 CPRI 2 CPRI 3 CPRI 4 CPRI 5

NOTE
The LBBPc can be used in both LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes, and the LBBPb can be used in only LTE
FDD mode.

Function
The LBBP has the following functions:
l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals
l Provides CPRI ports connected to RF modules

Table 5-27 describes the specifications of the LBBP working in LTE FDD mode.

Table 5-27 Specifications of the LBBP

Board Number of Cells Bandwidth of the Antenna


Cell Configuration

LBBPb 3 10M 2T2R

1 20M 2T2R

1 10M 4T4R

LBBPc 3 20M 2T2R

3 10M 4T4R

1 20M 4T4R

Table 5-28 describes the specifications of the LBBP working in LTE TDD mode.

Table 5-28 Specifications of the LBBP

Board Number of Cells Bandwidth of the Antenna


Cell Configuration

LBBPc 3 20M 2T2R

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Board Number of Cells Bandwidth of the Antenna


Cell Configuration

3 10M 4T4R

1 20M 4T4R

1 10M/20M 8T8R

LED
There are three LEDs on the panel of the LBBP. Table 5-29 describes the LEDs on the LBBP.

Table 5-29 LEDs on the LBBP

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green On The board is powered


on but is faulty.

Off The board is not


powered on, or it is
faulty.

On for 1s and off for The board is running


1s properly.

On for 0.125s and off Data is being loaded


for 0.125s to the board, or the
board is not started.

ALM Red On An alarm is


generated, and the
board must be
replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s An alarm is


and off for 1s) generated, and the
alarm may be caused
by an associated
board or port fault.
Therefore, you must
identify the fault
before replacing the
board.

Off The board is running


properly.

ACT Green On The board works in


active mode.

Off The board works in


standby mode.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

The LBBP provides six LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links. The LEDs are positioned
above the SFP ports. Table 5-30 describes the LEDs.

Table 5-30 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links


Label Color Status Description

TX RX Red/Green Steady green The CPRI link is


available.

Steady red The optical module


may fail to send or
receive signals. (The
failure may be caused
by a faulty optical
module or
disconnected optical
fiber.)

Blinking red (on for The RF unit in the


0.125s and off for CPRI link has a
0.125s) hardware fault.

Blinking red (on for The CPRI link is out


1s and off for 1s) of lock (The fault may
be caused by mutual
lock of dual-mode
clock sources or
mismatched data rate
over CPRI interfaces,
and you are advised to
check the system
configuration) or the
VSWR alarm is
reported on the RRUs
in the CPRI link
(because the USB
storage disk is under
test).

Off The SFP module is not


in position or the
optical module is
powered off.

Port
Table 5-31 describes the ports on the panel of the LBBP.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-31 Ports on the LBBP


Label Connector Quantity Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female 6 The CPRI ports


connect to the
LRRUs or LRFUs
for transmitting
service data, clock
signals, and
synchronization
information

5.2.7 FAN
The FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of the
fan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.

Panels
The FAN unit has two types of exterior, which are shown in Figure 5-22 and Figure 5-23.

Figure 5-22 FAN panel

Figure 5-23 FANc panel

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

NOTE
The FANc has FANc label, which is different from the FAN.

Functions
The FAN unit performs the following functions:
l Controls the fan speed.
l Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control
processing unit.
l Monitors the temperature at the air inlet.
l Dissipates heat.
l The FANc supports the function of reading and writing the information reported by the
electronic label unit.

LED
The FAN panel has only one LED, which indicates the operating status of the fans. Table
5-32 describes the LED.

Table 5-32 LED on the FAN panel


Label Color State Meaning

STATE Green On for 0.125s and off The module is not


for 0.125s registered, and no
alarm is reported.

On for 1s and off for The module is


1s running properly.

Red Off No alarm is


generated.

On for 1s and off for The unit is reporting


1s alarms.

5.2.8 UPEU
A universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts –48 V
DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.

Panel
UPEUs fall into three types: universal power and environment interface unit type A (UPEUa),
universal power and environment interface unit type B (UPEUb), and universal power and
environment interface unit type C (UPEUc). The UPEUa and UPEUc convert –48 V DC power
into +12 V DC power, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure
5-24, Figure 5-25, and Figure 5-26 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, and UPEUc
respectively.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-24 Panel of the UPEUa

(1) BBU power switch

Figure 5-25 Panel of the UPEUb

(1) BBU power switch

Figure 5-26 Panel of the UPEUc

(1) BBU power switch

NOTE
The UPEUa can be distinguished from the UPEUb by observing the silkscreen on the panel. The silkscreen
on the UPEUa is –48V and the silkscreen on the UPEUb is +24V. The UPEUa can also be distinguished
from the UPEUc because a UPEUc label is on the UPEUc.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Function
The UPEU performs the following functions:
l Converts –48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the only operating
voltage of the BBU.
l Provides ports for two RS485 signal inputs and eight Boolean signal inputs. The Boolean
signal inputs can be dry contact type or open collector (OC) type.
Table 5-33 lists the specifications of the UPEUs.

Table 5-33 Specifications of the UPEUs


Board Output Power Backup

UPEUa A UPEUa has an output 1+1 backup


power of 300 W.

UPEUc A UPEUc has an output 1+1 backup


power of 360 W and two
UPEUc boards have a total
output power of 650 W.

UPEUa+UPEUc A UPEUa and a UPEUc have -


a total output power of 360
W.

NOTE
If a UPEUa is replaced with a UPEUc, the power consumption changes in the monitoring of the power
consumption on the M2000. The monitoring result of the power consumption varies depending on the
output power and the sampling method. In this situation, the UPEUc and the UPEUa adopt different
sampling methods and therefore the monitored power consumption may decrease after a UPEUa is replaced
with a UPEUc.

Indicator
The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 5-34 lists
the indications of the indicator in different status.

Table 5-34 Indicator on the UPEU


Silkscreen Color Status Indication

RUN Green Steady on The board is


functional.

Off There is no power


supply, or the board
is faulty.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Port
A UPEU provides ports for two RS485 signal inputs and eight Boolean signal inputs. Figure
5-27 shows the positions of UPEUs in the BBU.

Figure 5-27 Positions of UPEUs in the BBU

Table 5-35 describes the ports on the UPEU.

Table 5-35 Ports


Slot Silkscree Connecto Quantity Remarks
n r Type

Slot 19 +24V or – 3V3 1 +24 V DC or –48 V DC power input


48V connector

EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 0 to 3


ALM0 connector

EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 4 to 7


ALM1 connector

MON0 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 signal input 0


connector

MON1 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 signal input 1


connector

Slot 18 +24V or – 3V3 1 +24 V DC or –48 V DC power input


48V connector

EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 0 to 3


ALM0 connector

EXT- RJ45 1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 4 to 7


ALM1 connector

MON0 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 signal input 0


connector

MON1 RJ45 1 Port for RS485 signal input 1


connector

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

5.2.9 UEIU
The Universal Environment Interface Unit (UEIU) transmits monitoring and alarm signals from
the external devices to the main control and transmission unit.

Panel
Figure 5-28 shows the panel of the UEIU.

Figure 5-28 Panel of the UEIU

Functions
The UEIU performs the following functions:
l Provides two ports, each transmitting one RS485 signal.
l Provides two ports, each transmitting four Boolean signals. The Boolean signal inputs can
be dry contact type or open collector (OC) type.
l Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control
and transmission unit.

Ports
The UEIU is configured in slot 18. It provides four ports with two ports transmitting two RS485
input signals and the other two ports transmitting eight Boolean signals.
Table 5-36 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.

Table 5-36 Ports on the panel of the UEIU


Slot Label Connect Quanti Description
or ty

slot 18 EXT- RJ-45 1 No.0 to 3 Boolean signal input ports


ALM0

EXT- RJ-45 1 No.4 to 7 Boolean signal input ports


ALM1

MON0 RJ-45 1 No.0 RS485 signal input port

MON1 RJ-45 1 No.1 RS485 signal input port

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

5.2.10 UTRP
This describes the Universal Transmission Processing unit (UTRP) board. As the transmission
extension board of the BBU3900, the UTRP provides eight E1s/T1s, one unchannelized STM-1/
OC-3 port, four electrical ports, or two optical ports.

Specification
Table 5-37 describes the specifications of the UTRP.

Table 5-37 Specifications of the UTRP


Board Sub-board/Board Port Mode
Type

UTRP2 UEOC Two universal FE/ UMTS


GE optical port

UTRP3 UAEC Ports for eight UMTS


channels of ATM
over E1/T1

UTRP4 UIEC Ports for eight UMTS


channels of IP over
E1/T1

UTRPb4 No sub-board Ports for eight GSM and LTE


channels of TDM
over E1/T1

UTRP6 UUAS Port for one UMTS


unchannelized
STM-1/OC-3

UTRP9 UQEC Four universal FE/ UMTS


GE electrical ports

Panels
Figure 5-29 shows the panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports.

Figure 5-29 Panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports

Figure 5-30 shows the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.

Figure 5-30 Panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s
UTRP RUN
ALM
ACT

E1/T1(0-3) E1/T1(4-7)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-31 shows the panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1.

Figure 5-31 Panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1

Figure 5-32 shows the panel of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports.

Figure 5-32 Panel of the UTRP supporting four electrical ports

Functions
The UTRP has the following functions:

l The UTRP2 provides two 100M/1000M Ethernet optical ports, performs functions of the
MAC layer, receives and transmits data on Ethernet links, and analyzes the MAC address.
l The UTRP3 provides eight E1s/T1s and performs inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing
on a single ATM cell flow on the eight E1/T1 links.
l The UTRP4 provides eight E1s/T1s, frames and deframes HDLC frames, and allocates and
controls the 256 HDLC timeslot channels.
l The UTRP4 provides an E1/T1 port for four TDM transmission links in GSM mode and
provides a port for four transmission links in another mode for co-transmission in a dual-
mode base station.
l The UTRP6 supports one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 port.
l The UTRP9 provides four 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet electrical ports and performs the
functions of the MAC layer and physical layer.
l The cold backup is supported.

LEDs
Table 5-38 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UTRP.

Table 5-38 LEDs on the panel of the UTRP

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green ON The board has power


input, but the board is
faulty.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Label Color Status Description

OFF The board has no


power input, or the
board is faulty.

ON for 1s and OFF The board is running


for 1s properly.

ON for 0.125s and The board is not


OFF for 0.125s configured or is
loading software.

ON for 2s and OFF The board is in the


for 2s offline state or under
test.

ALM Red ON or blinking The board is


rapidly reporting alarms.

OFF The board is running


properly.

ON for 2s and OFF The board is


for 2s reporting a minor
alarm.

ON for 1s and OFF The board is


for 1s reporting a major
alarm.

ON for 0.125s and The board is


OFF for 0.125s reporting a critical
alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in


standby mode.

The ACT indicator on the UTRPb4 board in GSM mode has different status as the ACT indicator
on other boards, as shown in Table 5-39.

Table 5-39 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRPb4 board in GSM mode
Status of the ACT Before Configurations After Configurations
Indicator Take Effect Take Effect

Steady on The board works in active The board works in active


mode, and none of the E1 mode
ports in GSM mode is
functional

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Status of the ACT Before Configurations After Configurations


Indicator Take Effect Take Effect

Steady off The board works in standby The board works in standby
mode mode

On for 0.125s and off for The board serves as an active -


0.125s board, and some or all E1
ports in GSM mode are
functional

UTRP2 and UTRP9 provide two LEDs for indicating the status of the current link. Table
5-40 describes the LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9.

Table 5-40 LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9
Label Color Status Description

LINK Green ON The link is properly


connected.

OFF The link is


disconnected.

ACT Orange Blinking The link is receiving


or transmitting data.

OFF The link is not


receiving or
transmitting data.

Ports
Table 5-41 describes the ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports.

Table 5-41 Ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports


Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP connector

Table 5-42 describes the ports on the UTRP3 and UTRP4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.

Table 5-42 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4 an UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s
Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type

E1/T1 E1/T1 port 2 DB26 connector

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-43 describes the port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1.

Table 5-43 Port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1


Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type

STM-1/OC-3 STM-1/OC-3 port 1 SFP connector

Table 5-44 describes the ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports.

Table 5-44 Ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports


Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type

FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ-45 connector

DIP Switches
There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.
The UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4 has three DIP switches numbered from SW1 to SW3. SW1
and SW2 are used to set the grounding status of the eight E1s. SW3 is used to set matched
impedance for the eight E1s. Figure 5-33 shows the DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4,
Figure 5-34 shows the DIP switch on the UTRPb4.

Figure 5-33 DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-34 DIP switch on the UTRPb4

Table 5-45, Table 5-46, and Table 5-47 describe how to set the DIP switches on the UTRP.

Table 5-45 DIP switch SW1 on the UTRP


DIP DIP Status Description
Switch
1 2 3 4

SW1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced


Mode

ON ON ON ON Unbalanced
Mode

Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled

Table 5-46 DIP switch SW2 on the UTRP


DIP DIP Status Description
Switch
1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF Balanced


Mode

ON ON ON ON Unbalanced
Mode

Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled

CAUTION
SW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to E1s No.4 to No.7 and SW2
corresponds to E1s No.0 to No.3.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-47 DIP switch SW3 on the UTRP


DIP DIP Status Description
Switch
1 2 3 4

SW3 OFF OFF ON ON T1 Mode

ON ON OFF OFF The E1


impedance is
set to 120
ohms.

ON ON ON ON The E1
impedance is
set to 75
ohms.

Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled

5.2.11 USCU
This section describes the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU).

Panel
There are two types of USCU: USCUb0, USCUb1 and USCUb2, as shown in Figure 5-35 and
Figure 5-36.

Figure 5-35 Panel of the USCUb0/USCUb1 (0.5 U)

Figure 5-36 Panel of the USCUb2 (1 U)

(1) GPS port (2) RGPS port (3) TOD port (4) M-1PPS port (5) BITS port

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Functions
The USCU has the following functions:

l The USCU provides interface for an external RGPS device (such as a reused device of the
operator), Metro1000 device, BITS device, and TOD input.
l The USCUb0 does not incorporate the satellite card.
l The USCUb1 has the GPS receiver. It is used for clock synchronization or obtaining
accurate clock signals from transmission devices.
l A dual-satellite receiver is configured in a USCUb2, which supports GPS, GLONASS, or
COMPASS clock signals.

LED
Table 5-48 and Table 5-49 describe the LEDs on the USCU.

Table 5-48 LEDs on the USCU

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, and the


board is faulty.

Off There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

Blinking (on for 1s The board is running properly.


and off for 1s)

Blinking (on for Software is being loaded to the


0.125s and off for board, or the board is not
0.125s) configured.

ALM Red Off The board is running properly,


and no alarm is generated.

On An alarm is generated, and the


board needs to be replaced.

Blinking (on for 1s An alarm is generated. The


and off for 1s) alarm may be caused due to
faults in the related boards or
ports. Therefore, whether the
board needs to be replaced
cannot be determined.

ACT Green On The serial port for


communication between the
USCU and the main control
board is enabled.

Off The serial port for


communication between the
USCU and the main control
board is disabled.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-49 LEDs on the TOD port

Color Meaning Default Configuration

Green On: The TOD port is The green LED of the TOD0 port is off,
configured as the input and the yellow LED of the TOD0 port is
port. on.

Yellow On: The TOD port is The yellow LED of the TOD1 port is off,
configured as the output and the green LED of the TOD1 port is on.
port.

Ports
Table 5-50 describes the ports on the USCU.

Table 5-50 Ports on the USCU

Port Connector Description

GPS port SMA coaxial Receives GPS signals


connector

RGPS port PCB welded Receives RGPS signals


wiring terminal

TOD0 port RJ-45 connector Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals

TOD1 port RJ-45 connector Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals, and


receives TOD signals from the M1000

BITS port SMA coaxial Receives BITS clock signals, and supports adaptive
connector input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock reference
source

M-1PPS port SMA coaxial Receives 1PPS signals from the M1000
connector

5.2.12 UBRI
The Universal Baseband Radio Interface Board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or
electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the
CPRI.

Panel
Figure 5-37 shows the panel of the UBRI.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 5-37 Panel of the UBRI

Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions:
l Provides extended CPRI optical or electrical ports
l Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI

LEDs
Table 5-51 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UBRI.

Table 5-51 LEDs on the panel of the UBRI

LED Color State Description

RUN Green ON steady There is power


supply, but the board
is faulty.

OFF steady There is no power


supply, or the board
is in the alarm status.

1s ON, 1s OFF The board works


properly.

0.125s ON, 0.125s The board is loading


OFF software.

ALM Red ON or blinking at a The board is in the


high frequency alarm status.

OFF steady No alarm is


generated.

ACT Green ON steady The board works


properly.

OFF steady The board is not


working.

The UBRI provides six LEDs indicating the status of the CRRI links, which are above the SFP
ports. Table 5-52 describes the CPRI link status LED.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 5-52 CPRI link status LED


Label Color State Description

CPRIx Red/Green ON (green) The CPRI link is


available.

ON (red) The optical module


fails to receive
signals.

0.125s ON, 0.125s The RRU on the CPRI


OFF (Red) link is faulty.

1s ON, 1s OFF (red) The CPRI link is out


of lock.

Ports
Table 5-53 describes the ports on the panel of the UBRI.

Table 5-53 Ports on the panel of the UBRI


Label Connector Port Quantity Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP 6 Connecting the BBU


and the RF module

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

About This Chapter

The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables of the
DBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configured
in the DBS3900.
6.1 Power Cable Connections
This section describes the power cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
6.2 Transmission Cable Connections
The transmission cable connections vary according the working modes of the indoor DBS3900
and outdoor DBS3900.
6.3 CPRI Cable Connections
The CPRI cable connections in the DBS3900 vary according to the working modes of the
DBS3900.
6.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

6.1 Power Cable Connections


This section describes the power cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.

6.1.1 Power Cable Connections for the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)


The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the power distribution unit (PDU), which
converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into –48 V DC power to provides power to customer
equipment. APM30 is short for advanced power module, and APM30H is short for advanced
power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.

NOTE
The DBS3900 is configured with the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario


When the input power is 110 V/220 V AC power, a distributed base station is configured with
one APM30, one transmission cabinet (TMC), and one battery backup cabinet (BBC). The
APM30 is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into –48 V
DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU, and TMC. Figure 6-1 describes power cable
connections.

Figure 6-1 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30,
one TMC, and one BBC

Table 6-1 lists the power cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-1 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30, one
TMC, and one BBC
SN Description

P1 Input Power Cable of the Power Cabinet

P2 and P5 Power cable for the fan box

P3 7.3 BBU Power Cable

P4 Input Power Cable of the APM30


Transmission Cabinet

P6 and P8 Input Power Cable of the Heating Film

P7 Input Power Cable of the Heater

When a base station is configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one
BBC, the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC
power into –48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU, and TMC11H (Ver.A).
Figure 6-2 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 6-2 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H
(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC

Table 6-2 lists the power cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-2 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H
(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC

SN Description

P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30H Power


Cabinet

P2 and P5 Power cable for the fan box

P3 BBU power cable

P4 Input Power Cable of the TMC11H

P6 and P8 Input power cables for the heating film in the


battery cabinet

P7 Input power cable for the heater in the battery


cabinet

When a base station is configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one
IBBS200T, the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220
V AC power into –48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU and TMC11H (Ver.A).
Figure 6-3 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 6-3 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H
(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T

Table 6-3 lists the power cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-3 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H
(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T
SN Description

P1 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P2 and P5 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 BBU power cable

P4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P6 and P7 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries

Power Cable Connections in the –48 V AC Power Supply Scenario


When the input power is –48 V DC, a distributed base station is configured with two TMCs.
The TMCs are configured with direct current distribution unit-03Bs (DCDU-03Bs), which
provide power to the BBU and RRU or transmission equipment. Figure 6-4 describes power
cable connections.

Figure 6-4 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs

Table 6-4 lists the power cables.

Table 6-4 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs
SN Description

P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30


Transmission Cabinet

P2 Power cable for the fan box

P3 BBU power cable

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

When two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.A) provide
power to the BBU, RRU, or transmission equipment. Figure 6-5 shows the power cable
connections.

Figure 6-5 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)

Table 6-5 lists the power cables.

Table 6-5 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
SN Description

P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30


Transmission Cabinet

P2 Power cable for the fan box

P3 BBU power cable

6.1.2 Power Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H


(Ver.C)
To meet the requirements of 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or –48 V DC power input, Huawei provides
a series of power equipment in the APM30H (Ver.B) and the APM30H (Ver.C). APM30H is
short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler. The power equipment converts
110 V AC or 220 V AC power to –48 V DC power and provides power to optional equipment.

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario


In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one
IBBS200D are configured. The APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the embedded power
system (EPS), which converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power to –48 V DC power and supplies
power to the baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and TMC11H (Ver.B). TMC11H
is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler. IBBS200D is short for integrated
battery backup system with direct cooler. Figure 6-6 shows the power cable connections.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-6 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one
TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

Table 6-6 lists the power cables.

Table 6-6 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H
(Ver.B), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description

P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box

P2 and P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 BBU power cable

P4 and P5 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries

P6 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P7 RRU Power Cable

P8 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P9 Power cable for the heating film

In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one
IBBS200D are configured. The EPS in the APM30H (Ver.C) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC
power to –48 V DC power and supplies power to the BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure
6-7 shows the power cable connections.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-7 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one
TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

Table 6-7 lists the power cables.

Table 6-7 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H
(Ver.C), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description

P1 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box

P3 Power Cables for Storage Batteries

P4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P5 External AC Input Power Cable

P6 RRU power cable

P7 BBU Power Cable

P8 and P9 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D

P10 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-8 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one integrated battery backup system with TEC
(IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.

Figure 6-8 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one
TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

Table 6-8 lists the power cables.

Table 6-8 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H
(Ver.B), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description

P1 and P9 Power cable for the junction box

P2 and P10 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 BBU power cable

P4 and P5 Power Cables for the TEC Cooler

P6 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P7 RRU Power Cable

P8 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

Figure 6-9 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200T.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-9 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one
TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

Table 6-9 lists the power cables.

Table 6-9 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H
(Ver.C), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description

P1 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box

P3 Power Cables for Storage Batteries

P4 External AC Input Power Cable

P5 RRU power cable

P6 BBU Power Cable

P7 and P8 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D

P9 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P10 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H

Figure 6-10 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-10 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B),
one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

Table 6-10 lists the power cables.

Table 6-10 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H
(Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description

P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box

P2, P6, and P12 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 BBU power cable

P4 and P5 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D

P7 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P8 RRU Power Cable

P9 Power cable for the heating film

P11 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P13 and P14 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries

Figure 6-11 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-11 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C),
one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

Table 6-11 lists the power cables.

Table 6-11 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H
(Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description

P1 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box

P3 Power Cables for Storage Batteries

P4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P5 External AC Input Power Cable

P6 RRU power cable

P7 BBU Power Cable

P8 and P9 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D

P10 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H

P12 and P13 Power Cables for Storage Batteries

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-12 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ts.

Figure 6-12 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B),
one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

Table 6-12 lists the power cables.

Table 6-12 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H
(Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description

P1 and P9 Power cable for the junction box

P2, P6, and P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 BBU power cable

P4 and P5 Power Cables for the TEC Cooler

P7 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P8 RRU Power Cable

P10 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P12 and P13 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-13 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ts.

Figure 6-13 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C),
one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

Table 6-13 lists the power cables.

Table 6-13 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H
(Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

SN Description

P1 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box

P3 Power Cables for Storage Batteries

P4 External AC Input Power Cable

P5 RRU power cable

P6 BBU Power Cable

P7 and P8 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D

P9 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P10 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

SN Description

P11 and P12 Power Cables for Storage Batteries

In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are required. The power cable connections for the cabinets
housing BBU0 and BBU1 are the same. Figure 6-14 and Figure 6-15 show the power cable
connections in a triple-mode scenario when the BBU is configured in the APM30H (Ver.B).

Figure 6-14 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B),
one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario

Table 6-14 lists the power cables.

Table 6-14 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H
(Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario

SN Description

P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box

P2 and P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 BBU power cable

P4 and P5 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries

P6 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P7 RRU Power Cable

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

SN Description

P8 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P9 Power cable for the heating film

Figure 6-15 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B),
one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario
P2 P2
P12
P11
P1 P1

P9 P9 P7 P9 P7
P10
P10
P3 P3
BBU0 BBU1
P6 P6

P4 P4
P5 P5

P13 P13
P14 P14

P8 P8

Table 6-15 lists the power cables.

Table 6-15 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H
(Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario

SN Description

P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box

P2, P6, and P12 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 BBU power cable

P4 and P5 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D

P7 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P8 RRU Power Cable

P9 Power cable for the heating film

P11 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P13 and P14 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Power Cable Connections in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) are configured. The DCDU-03B
supplies power to the BBU, RRU, and other components. Figure 6-16 shows the power cable
connections.

Figure 6-16 Power cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode
scenario

Table 6-16 lists the power cables.

Table 6-16 Power cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description

P1 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P2 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H

P3 BBU power cable

In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) are configured. The DCDU-11B
supplies power to the BBU, RRU, or transmission devices. Figure 6-17 shows the power cable
connections.

Figure 6-17 Power cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode or dual-mode
scenario

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-17 lists the power cables.

Table 6-17 Power cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

SN Description

P1 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P2 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H

P3 BBU power cable

In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are required. The power cable connections for the cabinets
housing BBU0 and BBU1 are the same. Figure 6-18 shows the power cable connections in a
triple-mode scenario, taking the TMC11H (Ver.B) as an example.

Figure 6-18 Power cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario

Table 6-18 lists the power cables.

Table 6-18 Power cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario

SN Description

P1 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P2 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H

P3 BBU power cable

Power Cable Connections in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario


in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, one +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B) is configured. The
power system (DC/DC) converts the +24 V DC power to –48 V DC power and supplies the
power to the DCDU-03B, which supplies power to the BBU, RRUs, and other devices in the
cabinet. Figure 6-19 shows the power cable connections.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-19 Power cable connections for one APM30H (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode
scenario

Table 6-19 lists the power cables.

Table 6-19 Power cables for one +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode
scenario

SN Description

P1 Input power cable for the power system (DC/


DC)

P2 Input power cable for the DCDU-03B

P3 BBU power cable

In a triple-mode scenario, two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) are configured. Figure 6-20 shows
the power cable connections.

Figure 6-20 Power cable connections for two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode
scenario

Table 6-20 lists the power cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-20 Power cables for two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario

SN Description

P1 Input power cable for the power system (DC/


DC)

P2 Input power cable for the DCDU-03B

P3 BBU power cable

6.1.3 Power Cable Connections of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06


To meet the requirements of 110 V AC, 220 V AC, –48 V DC, or +24 V DC power input, the
outdoor mini box (OMB) and the indoor mini box (IMB03) are configured with a power system
(AC/DC or DC/DC) to convert 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or +24 V DC power to –48 V DC power
and then supply power to customer equipment.

NOTE

l For power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an IMB03 or with an IMB03 and an indoor
floor installation support (IFS06) in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, +24 V DC, or –48 V DC power supply
scenarios, see the DBS3900 Installation Guide and the DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
l If a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB or an IMB03, the DBS3900 can be configured as a single-
mode or dual-mode base station. If a DBS3900 is configured with an IMB03 and an IFS06, the
DBS3900 can be configured as a triple-mode base station.

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario


Figure 6-21 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110
V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario.

Figure 6-21 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110 V AC or
220 V AC power supply scenario

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-21 lists the power cables.

Table 6-21 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110 V AC or 220 V AC
power supply scenario
SN Description

P1 Power cable for the inner air circulation fan

P2 Power cable for the heat exchange unit type


A (HEUA)

P3 Baseband unit (BBU) power cable

P4 Input power cable for the DC power


distribution box

P5 Power cable for the outer air circulation fan

P6 Input power cable for the power system (AC/


DC)

P7 AC input power cable for the OMB

Power Cable Connections in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


Figure 6-22 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in DC
power supply scenario.

Figure 6-22 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in DC power
supply scenario

Table 6-22 lists the power cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-22 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110 V AC or 220 V AC
power supply scenario
SN Description

P1 Power cable for the inner air circulation fan

P2 Power cable for the HEUA

P3 Power cable for the outer air circulation fan

P4 BBU power cable

P5 DC input power cable for the OMB

6.2 Transmission Cable Connections


The transmission cable connections vary according the working modes of the indoor DBS3900
and outdoor DBS3900.

6.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM Only


Base Station
In a GSM only base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can
be used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable


Figure 6-23 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data
transmission in a GSM only base station where only the GTMU is configured as the transmission
board in the BBU3900.

Figure 6-23 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 6-23 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-23 E1/T1 cable connections


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-24 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data
transmission in a GSM only base station where the GTMU and UTRP4 are configured as
transmission boards in the BBU3900.

Figure 6-24 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 6-24 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-24 E1/T1 cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable


Figure 6-25 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when the
FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission.

Figure 6-25 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Table 6-25 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-25 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-26 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when the
FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission.

Figure 6-26 FE/GE optical cable connections

Table 6-26 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-26 FE/GE optical cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

6.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM Only


Base Station
In a GSM base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be
used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable


Figure 6-27 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data
transmission in a GSM only base station where only the GTMU is configured as the transmission
board in the BBU3900.

Figure 6-27 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 6-27 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-27 E1/T1 cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-28 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data
transmission in a GSM only base station where the GTMU and UTRP4 are configured as
transmission boards in the BBU3900.

Figure 6-28 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 6-28 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-28 E1/T1 cable connections


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable


Figure 6-29 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used
for data transmission.

Figure 6-29 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Table 6-29 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-29 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-30 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cable is used for
data transmission.

Figure 6-30 FE/GE optical cable connections

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-30 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-30 FE/GE optical cable connections


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only


Base Station
In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be
used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable


Figure 6-31 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for
data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 6-31 E1/T1 cable connections (1)

Table 6-31 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-31 E1/T1 cable connections (1)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 6-32 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for
data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and UTRP3 (or UTRP4) are configured as
the main control board in the BBU.

Figure 6-32 E1/T1 cable connections (2)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-32 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-32 E1/T1 cable connections (2)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable


Figure 6-33 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is
used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 6-33 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)

Table 6-33 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-33 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-34 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is
used for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and the UTRP9 are configured in
the BBU.

Figure 6-34 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-34 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-34 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-35 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is
used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 6-35 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)

Table 6-35 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-35 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-36 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is
used for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and the UTRP2 are configured in
the BBU.

Figure 6-36 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)

Table 6-36 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-36 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only


Base Station
In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be
used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable


Figure 6-37 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for
data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 6-37 E1/T1 cable connections (1)

Table 6-37 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-37 E1/T1 cable connections (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 6-38 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for
data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP3/UTRP4 is configured in
the BBU.

Figure 6-38 E1/T1 cable connections (2)

Table 6-38 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-38 E1/T1 cable connections (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Transmission over the FE Cable


Figure 6-39 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is
used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 6-39 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)

Table 6-39 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-39 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-40 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is
used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP9 is configured in
the BBU.

Figure 6-40 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)

Table 6-40 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-40 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-41 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is
used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 6-41 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-41 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-41 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-42 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is
used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP2 is configured in
the BBU.

Figure 6-42 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)

Table 6-42 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-42 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

6.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only


Base Station
In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data
transmission.

Transmission over the E1/T1 Cable


When the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 6-43 shows
the transmission cable connections.

Figure 6-43 E1/T1 cable connections

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-43 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-43 E1/T1 cable connections


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE/GE Cable


When an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usually
used for data transmission. Figure 6-44 shows the transmission cable connections.

Figure 6-44 FE/GE optical cable connections

Table 6-44 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-44 FE/GE optical cable connections


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-45 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when the
FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission.

Figure 6-45 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Table 6-45 describes the cable connections.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-45 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

6.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base


Station
In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data
transmission.

Transmission over the E1/T1 Cable


When the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 6-46 shows
the transmission cable connections.

Figure 6-46 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 6-46 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-46 E1/T1 cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE/GE Cable


When an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usually
used for data transmission. Figure 6-47 shows the transmission cable connections.

Figure 6-47 FE/GE optical cable connections

Table 6-47 describes the cable connections.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-47 FE/GE optical cable connections


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-48 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when the
FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission.

Figure 6-48 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Table 6-48 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-48 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

6.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS


Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IP
co-transmission can be used. Based on the IP co-transmission, the GSM+UMTS base station
can implement route backup. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used.
Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of
the other type are connected to the transport network.

TDM Common Transmission


Figure 6-49 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM
common transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GTMU serves as the shared port to
connect to the BSC and RNC. The GTMU communicates with the WMPT using the backplane
to implement TDM common transmission.

Figure 6-49 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common
transmission mode (1)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-49 describes the cables.

Table 6-49 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission
mode (1)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 6-50 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM
common transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GSM UTRP serves as the shared port
to connect to the BSC and RNC. The GSM UTRP communicates with the WMPT using the
backplane to implement TDM common transmission.
NOTE

Note that the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and the WMPT can also be used for data transmission independently,
but the corresponding cable connections are not shown here.

Figure 6-50 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common
transmission mode (2)

Table 6-50 describes the cables.

Table 6-50 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission
mode (2)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

IP Over E1 Common Transmission


Figure 6-51 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP
common transmission mode when the E1/F1 port on the UMTS UTRP serves as the shared port
to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE electrical ports on the GTMU and the WMPT
are interconnected to implement IP common transmission.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

NOTE

IP common transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU
and the WMPT. The transmission cable connections are similar to Figure 6-51, which are not described here.

Figure 6-51 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1
common transmission mode (1)

Table 6-51 describes the cables.

Table 6-51 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (1)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 6-52 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-
transmission mode when the WMPT E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for data transmission,
and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement
IP co-transmission.
NOTE

IP common transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU
and the WMPT. The transmission cable connections are similar to Figure 6-52, which are not described here.

Figure 6-52 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1
common transmission mode (2)

Table 6-52 describes the cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-52 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (2)
SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

IP Over FE Common Transmission


Figure 6-53 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-
transmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared ports
for data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 are
interconnected to implement IP co-transmission.

Figure 6-53 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE
common transmission mode (1)

Table 6-53 describes the cables.

Table 6-53 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE
common transmission mode (1)
SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-54 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-
transmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for data
transmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected
to implement IP co-transmission.

Figure 6-54 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE
common transmission mode (2)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-54 describes the cables.

Table 6-54 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE
common transmission mode (2)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-55 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP
common transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT serves as the shared
port to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU and the WMPT
are interconnected to implement IP common transmission.

Figure 6-55 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE
common transmission mode (3)

Table 6-55 describes the cables.

Table 6-55 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE
common transmission mode (3)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission


In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has the
following characteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC and RNC
respectively using the active channel.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

l The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected using FE ports on their panels.
l If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel is
restored, the route is switched back to the active one.
l The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of the
GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Quality
of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has the
following limitations:
l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
common transmission.
l The route backup mode is not applicable to the ports on the UTRPs for GSM or UMTS
transmission. It is applicable only to the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels.
l In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPT panels are
interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the BSC
and the RNC.
Figure 6-56 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT
are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and
RNC.

Figure 6-56 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE
electrical ports connected to the base station controller

Table 6-56 describes the cables.

Table 6-56 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports
connected to the base station controller
SN Description

T1 and T3 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 and T4 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

Figure 6-57 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and
WMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC
and RNC.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-57 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and
FE optical ports connected to the base station controller

Table 6-57 describes the cables.

Table 6-57 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports
connected to the base station controller
SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

6.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS


Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IP
co-transmission can be used. Based on the IP co-transmission, the GSM+UMTS base station
can implement route backup. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used.
Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of
the other type are connected to the transport network.

TDM Common Transmission


Figure 6-58 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM
common transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GTMU serves as the shared port to
connect to the BSC and RNC. The GTMU communicates with the WMPT using the backplane
to implement TDM common transmission.

Figure 6-58 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common
transmission mode (1)

Table 6-58 describes the cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-58 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission
mode (1)
SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 6-59 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM
common transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GSM UTRP serves as the shared port
to connect to the BSC and RNC. The GSM UTRP communicates with the WMPT using the
backplane to implement TDM common transmission.
NOTE

Note that the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and the WMPT can also be used for data transmission independently,
but the corresponding cable connections are not shown here.

Figure 6-59 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common
transmission mode (2)

Table 6-59 describes the cable.

Table 6-59 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission
mode (2)
SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

IP Over E1 Common Transmission


Figure 6-60 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP
common transmission mode when the E1/F1 port on the UMTS UTRP serves as the shared port
to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE electrical ports on the GTMU and the WMPT
are interconnected to implement IP common transmission.
NOTE

IP common transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU
and the WMPT. The transmission cable connections are similar to Figure 6-60, which are not described here.

Figure 6-60 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1
common transmission mode (1)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-60 describes the cables.

Table 6-60 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (1)
SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T2 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

Figure 6-61 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP
common transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT serves as the shared
port to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU and the WMPT
are interconnected to implement IP common transmission.

Figure 6-61 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1
common transmission mode (2)

Table 6-61 describes the cables.

Table 6-61 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (2)
SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T2 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

IP Over FE Common Transmission


Figure 6-62 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-
transmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared ports
for data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 are
interconnected to implement IP co-transmission.

Figure 6-62 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE
common transmission mode (1)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-62 describes the cables.

Table 6-62 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE
common transmission mode (1)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-63 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-
transmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for data
transmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected
to implement IP co-transmission.

Figure 6-63 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE
common transmission mode (2)

Table 6-63 describes the cables.

Table 6-63 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE
common transmission mode (2)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission


In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has the
following characteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC and RNC
respectively using the active channel.
l The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected using FE ports on their panels.
l If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel is
restored, the route is switched back to the active one.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

l The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of the
GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Quality
of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has the
following limitations:
l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
common transmission.
l The route backup mode is not applicable to the ports on the UTRPs for GSM or UMTS
transmission. It is applicable only to the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels.
l In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPT panels are
interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the BSC
and the RNC.
Figure 6-64 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT
are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and
RNC.

Figure 6-64 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE
electrical ports connected to the BSC and RNC

Table 6-64 describes the cables.

Table 6-64 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports
connected to the BSC and RNC
SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

Figure 6-65 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and
WMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC
and RNC.

Figure 6-65 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and
FE optical ports connected to the BSC and RNC

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-65 describes the cables.

Table 6-65 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports
connected to the BSC and RNC

SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

6.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS


Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmission
links can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typical
manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1


Figure 6-66 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for data
transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in
separate transmission mode.

Figure 6-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1
mode

Table 6-66 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE


Figure 6-67 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are used
for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works
in separate transmission mode.

Figure 6-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE
mode (1)

Table 6-67 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE
mode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-68 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are used
for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works
in separate transmission mode.

Figure 6-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE
mode (2)

Table 6-68 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE
mode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

6.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS


Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmission
links can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typical
manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1


Figure 6-69 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for data
transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in
separate transmission mode.

Figure 6-69 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode

Table 6-69 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-69 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE


Figure 6-70 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are used
for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works
in separate transmission mode.

Figure 6-70 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)

Table 6-70 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-70 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)


Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-71 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are used
for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works
in separate transmission mode.

Figure 6-71 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)

Table 6-71 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-71 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

6.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE


Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A GSM+LTE base station implements IP over E1 and IP over FE/GE co-transmission based on
the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT
panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports
on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are
used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport
network.

IP over E1 Common Transmission


Figure 6-72 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.

Figure 6-72 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (1)

Table 6-72 describes the cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-72 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (1)
SN Description

T1 and T3 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 and T4 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

Figure 6-73 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical
port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.

Figure 6-73 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (2)

Table 6-73 describes the cables.

Table 6-73 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (2)
SN Description

T1 and T3 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 and T4 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

IP over FE/GE Common Transmission


Figure 6-74 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-74 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE
common transmission mode (1)

Table 6-74 describes the cables.

Table 6-74 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common
transmission mode (1)
SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-75 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.

Figure 6-75 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE
common transmission mode (2)

Table 6-75 describes the cables.

Table 6-75 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common
transmission mode (2)
SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission


In a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following
characteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the transmission
equipment respectively using the active channel.
l The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.
l If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel is
restored, the route is switched back to the active one.
l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the
GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Quality
of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode
apply:
l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
common transmission.
l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM
and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels.
l In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT panels are
interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the
transmission equipment.
Figure 6-76 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and
LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the
transmission equipment.

Figure 6-76 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and
FE optical ports connected to the transmission equipment

Table 6-76 describes the cables.

Table 6-76 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports
connected to the transmission equipment
SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

Figure 6-77 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPT

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmission
equipment.

Figure 6-77 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE
electrical ports connected to the transmission equipment

Table 6-77 describes the cables.

Table 6-77 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports
connected to the transmission equipment
SN Description

T1 and T3 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 and T4 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

6.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE


Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A GSM+LTE base station implements IP over E1 and IP over FE/GE co-transmission based on
the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT
panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports
on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are
used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport
network.

IP Over E1 Common Transmission


Figure 6-78 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical
port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.

Figure 6-78 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (1)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-78 describes the cables.

Table 6-78 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (1)
SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

Figure 6-79 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.

Figure 6-79 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (2)

Table 6-79 describes the cables.

Table 6-79 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (2)
SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

IP Over FE/GE Common Transmission


Figure 6-80 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.

Figure 6-80 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE
common transmission mode (1)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-80 describes the cables.

Table 6-80 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common
transmission mode (1)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-81 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.

Figure 6-81 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE
common transmission mode

Table 6-81 describes the cables.

Table 6-81 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common
transmission mode

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T2 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission


In a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following
characteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and LMPT are connected to the transport network
through the primary channel.
l The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.
l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel
is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the
GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, the
Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode
apply:
l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
transmission.
l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM
and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels.
l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT
panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected
to the transport network.
Figure 6-82 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and
LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the base
station controller.

Figure 6-82 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and
FE optical ports connected to the base station controller

Table 6-82 describes the cables.

Table 6-82 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports
connected to the base station controller
SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to the BSC
and RNC
Figure 6-83 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPT
are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the base station
controller.

Figure 6-83 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE
electrical ports connected to the base station controller

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-83 describes the cables.

Table 6-83 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports
connected to the base station controller

SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE


Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links
can be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical manners
of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GE


Figure 6-84 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM
side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-84 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Table 6-84 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-84 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode
(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Cable Number Cable Description

T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-85 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM
side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-85 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Table 6-85 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-85 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode
(2)
Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-86 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)
on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port is
used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-86 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Table 6-86 describes the cable connections.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-86 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode
(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T6 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-87 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)
on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used
for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-87 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Table 6-87 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-87 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode
(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE


Figure 6-88 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separate
transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both the
GSM and LTE sides.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode
(1)

Table 6-88 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode
(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-89 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port
is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode
(2)

Table 6-89 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode
(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE


Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links
can be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical manners
of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GE


Figure 6-90 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM
side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Table 6-90 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode
(1)
Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-91 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM
side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Table 6-91 describes the cable connections.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode
(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-92 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)
on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port is
used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Table 6-92 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode
(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-93 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)
on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used
for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-93 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode
(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE


Figure 6-94 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separate
transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both the
GSM and LTE sides.

Figure 6-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode
(1)

Table 6-94 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode
(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-95 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the
FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port
is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode
(2)

Table 6-95 describes the cable connections.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode
(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

6.2.15 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE


Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection
between the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route
backup and hybrid transmission can be implemented.

IP Over E1 Common Transmission


Figure 6-96 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.

Figure 6-96 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1
common transmission mode (1)

Table 6-96 describes the cables.

Table 6-96 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (1)

SN Description

T1 and T3 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 and T4 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-97 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the
E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical
port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.

Figure 6-97 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1
common transmission mode (2)

Table 6-97 describes the cables.

Table 6-97 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1
common transmission mode (2)
SN Description

T1 and T3 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 and T4 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

IP Over FE/GE Common Transmission


Figure 6-98 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the
FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.

Figure 6-98 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE
common transmission mode (1)

Table 6-98 describes the cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-98 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common
transmission mode (1)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-99 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the
FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.

Figure 6-99 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE
common transmission mode (2)

Table 6-99 describes the cables.

Table 6-99 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common
transmission mode (2)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission


In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type (either optical or electrical ports) on the WMPT
and LMPT are interconnected, and the FE ports of the other type (either optical or electrical
ports) on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment.

In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following
characteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the transmission
equipment respectively using the active channel.
l The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

l If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel is
restored, the route is switched back to the active one.
l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the
UMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the
Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode
apply:
l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
common transmission.
l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTS
and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels.
l In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPT panels are
interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the
transmission equipment.
Figure 6-100 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT and
LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the
transmission equipment.

Figure 6-100 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup
mode with IP common transmission (1)

Table 6-100 describes the cables.

Table 6-100 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP
common transmission (1)
SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

Figure 6-101 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPT
are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmission
equipment.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-101 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup
mode with IP common transmission (2)

Table 6-101 describes the cables.

Table 6-101 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP
common transmission (2)

SN Description

T1 and T3 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 and T4 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

Hybrid Transmission
In hybrid transmission mode, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port serve as shared ports
to connect to the transmission equipment. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services with
high QoS requirements, such as CS services; and the FE/GE port is used to transmit the services
with low QoS requirements, such as PS services.

The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTE
base station in hybrid transmission mode. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GE
port are used for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable.

Figure 6-102 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTS
E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port).

Figure 6-102 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (1)

Table 6-102 describes the cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-102 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (1)


SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T4 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-103 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTS
E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port).

Figure 6-103 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (2)

Table 6-103 describes the cables.

Table 6-103 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (2)


SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection


Transfer Cable.

T4 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

6.2.16 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE


Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection
between the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route
backup and hybrid transmission can be implemented.

IP Over E1 Common Transmission


Figure 6-104 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.

Figure 6-104 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1
common transmission mode (1)

Table 6-104 describes the cables.

Table 6-104 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (1)
SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

Figure 6-105 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.

Figure 6-105 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1
common transmission mode (2)

Table 6-105 describes the cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-105 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common
transmission mode (2)

SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

IP Over FE/GE Common Transmission


Figure 6-106 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.

Figure 6-106 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE
common transmission mode (1)

Table 6-106 describes the cables.

Table 6-106 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common
transmission mode (1)

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-107 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/
GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.

Figure 6-107 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE
common transmission mode

Table 6-107 describes the cables.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-107 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common
transmission mode

SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T2 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission


In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type (either optical or electrical ports) on the WMPT
and LMPT are interconnected, and the FE ports of the other type (either optical or electrical
ports) on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following
characteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The WMPT and LMPT are connected to the transport network
through the primary channel.
l The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.
l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel
is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.
l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the
UMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, the
Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode
apply:
l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
transmission.
l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTS
and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels.
l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPT
panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected
to the transport network.
Figure 6-108 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT and
LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the
transmission equipment.

Figure 6-108 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup
mode with IP common transmission (1)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-108 describes the cables.

Table 6-108 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP
common transmission (1)

SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

Figure 6-109 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route
backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPT
are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmission
equipment.

Figure 6-109 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup
mode with IP common transmission (2)

Table 6-109 describes the cables.

Table 6-109 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP
common transmission (2)

SN Description

T1 and T2 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

Hybrid Transmission
In hybrid transmission mode, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port serve as shared ports
to connect to the transmission equipment. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services with
high QoS requirements, such as CS services; and the FE/GE port is used to transmit the services
with low QoS requirements, such as PS services.

The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTE
base station in hybrid transmission mode. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GE
port are used for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-110 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTS
E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port).

Figure 6-110 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (1)

Table 6-110 describes the cables.

Table 6-110 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (1)


SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE


Electrical Ports.

Figure 6-111 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTS
E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port).

Figure 6-111 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (2)

Table 6-111 describes the cables.

Table 6-111 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (2)


SN Description

T1 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE


Optical Ports.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

6.2.17 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE


Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links
can be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typical
manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GE


Figure 6-112 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the
UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-112 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Table 6-112 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-112 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-113 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the
UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-113 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-113 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-113 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 6-114 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission
on the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-114 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Table 6-114 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-114 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T6 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-115 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission
on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-115 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Table 6-115 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-115 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE


Figure 6-116 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in
separate transmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both the
UMTS and LTE sides.

Figure 6-116 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Table 6-116 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-116 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 and T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-117 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical
port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-117 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Table 6-117 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-117 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer


Cable.

T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

6.2.18 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE


Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links
can be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typical
manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GE


Figure 6-118 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the
UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-118 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-118 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-118 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 6-119 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the
UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-119 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Table 6-119 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-119 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 6-120 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission
on the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-120 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-120 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-120 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-121 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission
on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-121 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Table 6-121 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-121 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE


Figure 6-122 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in
separate transmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both the
UMTS and LTE sides.

Figure 6-122 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-122 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-122 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
mode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-123 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when
the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical
port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 6-123 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Table 6-123 describes the cable connections.

Table 6-123 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
mode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

6.2.19 Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base


Station
The triple-mode base station solution is provided by Huawei in SingleRAN6.0, which is
applicable to three scenarios: GU+LO, GL+UO, and UO+GL. This section describes the
transmission cable connections for the triple-mode base stations in three scenarios.

In SingleRAN6.0, a single BBU can support a maximum of two modes, and two BBUs are
required for a triple-mode base station.

In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.
l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,
and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
l In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,
and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

l The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL
+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while
the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.

GU (BBU0)+LO (BBU1)
In the GU+LO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. The common transmission mode,
separate transmission mode, and route backup mode with IP common transmission are
supported. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.7 Transmission Cable
Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.8
Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-
Transmission Mode, 6.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS
Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode, and 6.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections
in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode.
In the GU+LO scenario, BBU1 works in LTE Only mode. For details about the transmission
cable connections, see 6.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base
Station and 6.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station.

GL (BBU0)+UO (BBU1)
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode. The common transmission mode,
separate transmission mode, and route backup mode with IP common transmission are
supported. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.11 Transmission Cable
Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.12
Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-
Transmission Mode, 6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE
Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode, and 6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections
in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode.
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS Only mode. For details about the transmission
cable connections, see 6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only
Base Station and 6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base
Station.

UO (BBU0)+GL (BBU1)
In the UO+GL scenario, BBU0 works in UMTS Only mode. For details about the transmission
cable connections, see 6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only
Base Station and 6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base
Station.
In the UO+GL scenario, BBU1 works in GSM+LTE mode. The common transmission mode,
separate transmission mode, and route backup mode with IP common transmission are
supported. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.11 Transmission Cable
Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.12
Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-
Transmission Mode, 6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE
Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode, and 6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections
in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

6.3 CPRI Cable Connections


The CPRI cable connections in the DBS3900 vary according to the working modes of the
DBS3900.

6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections
can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
Figure 6-124 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPb,
the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, and the
MIMO is supported.

Figure 6-124 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 6-125 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPb,
the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, the MIMO
is supported or bandwidth and carriers are expanded, and two RRU3804s work in the same sector
are cascaded.

Figure 6-125 CPRI cable connections (2)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-126 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPd,
the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, the MIMO
is supported or bandwidth and carriers are expanded, and two RRU3804s work in the same sector
are cascaded.

Figure 6-126 CPRI cable connections (3)

6.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can
be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
When the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, six RRUs correspond to three sectors.
In this case, a pair of two RRUs working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded.
Figure 6-127 shows the CPRI cable connections.

Figure 6-127 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, nine RRUs correspond to three
sectors. In this case, a group of three RRUs working in the same sector with different bands is
cascaded. Figure 6-128 shows the CPRI cable connections.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-128 CPRI cable connections (2)

6.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable
connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
Figure 6-129 shows the CPRI cable connections when the RRU3908 works in single-band mode
and three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors.

Figure 6-129 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, an RRU3804 working in star topology
corresponds to a sector, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, two
RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of
two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, the
CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-130.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-130 CPRI cable connections (2)

When the RRU3804 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3804s correspond to a sector, and a
pair of two RRU3804s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, or when the
RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and
chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the
same sector with different bands is cascaded, the CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure
6-131.

Figure 6-131 CPRI cable connections (3)

When the RRU3908 works in single-band mode, three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology
correspond to three sectors, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in single-band mode, and
three RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star topology correspond to three sectors, the CPRI
cable connections are shown in Figure 6-132.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-132 CPRI cable connections (4)

6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector
and frequency band.

NOTE
The CPRI ports on the LBBP are connected to the RRUs from CPRI0 in sequence, and none of the ports
is skipped.

When the RRU works in single-band mode, it serves not more than three sectors, uses 10 MHz
or 20 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown in
Figure 6-133.

Figure 6-133 CPRI cable connections (1)

Figure 6-134 shows the CPRI cable connections of the two combined RRUs serving not more
than three cells. The RRUs work in single-band 4T4R MIMO mode, providing 10 MHz
bandwidth.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-134 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 6-135 shows the CPRI cable connections of the two combined RRUs serving not more
than three cells. The RRUs work in single-band 4T4R MIMO mode, providing 20 MHz
bandwidth. .

Figure 6-135 CPRI cable connections (3)

6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector
and frequency band.
When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three
sectors and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3008 works in dual-band mode, two
RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology correspond to one sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s
working in the same sector with different bands are connected in cascading mode. The CPRI
cable connections are shown in Figure 6-136.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-136 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3201 works in dual-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three
sectors, uses 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3008
works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology serve one sector, and
a pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected in
cascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-137.

Figure 6-137 CPRI cable connections (2)

When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it serves three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth,
supports 4T4R MIMO, and the RRUs in a sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3008
works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology serve one sector, and
a pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected in
cascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-138.

Figure 6-138 CPRI cable connections (3)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

When the RRU3908 works in single-band mode, three RRU3908s serve three sectors, and the
RRUs working in the same sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3008 works in
single-band mode, three RRU3008s working in star topology serve three sectors. The CPRI cable
connections are shown in Figure 6-139.

Figure 6-139 CPRI cable connections (4)

6.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in UL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector
and frequency band.
When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three
sectors and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, it working
in CPRI star topology serves three sectors and does not support MIMO. The CPRI cable
connections are shown in Figure 6-140.

Figure 6-140 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3201 works in dual-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three
sectors, uses 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3804
works in single-band mode, a pair of RRUs working in the same sector are connected in

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

cascading mode, and the star topology is used. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure
6-141.

Figure 6-141 CPRI cable connections (2)

When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it serves three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth,
supports 4T4R MIMO, and the RRUs working in the same sector use the dual-star topology.
When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, it working in star topology corresponds to three
sectors, and the RRUs working in the same sector are connected in cascading mode. The CPRI
cable connections are shown in Figure 6-142.

Figure 6-142 CPRI cable connections (3)

6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Base Station


The triple-mode base station solution is provided by Huawei in SingleRAN6.0, which is
applicable to three scenarios: GU+LO, GL+UO, and UO+GL. This section describes the CPRI
cable connections for the triple-mode base stations in three scenarios.
In SingleRAN6.0, a single BBU can support a maximum of two modes, and two BBUs are
required for a triple-mode base station.
In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,
and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
l In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,
and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
l The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL
+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while
the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.

GU (BBU0)+LO (BBU1)
In the GU+LO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. 6.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections
in the GSM+UMTS Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
In the GU+LO scenario, BBU1 works in LTE Only mode. 6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in
the LO Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.

GL (BBU0)+UO (BBU1)
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode. 6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in
the GL Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS Only mode. 6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in
the UMTS Only Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.

UO (BBU0)+GL (BBU1)
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU0 works in UMTS Only mode. 6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in
the UMTS Only Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU1 works in GSM+LTE mode. 6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in
the GL Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.

6.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections


This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.

6.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the APM30 or


APM30H (Ver.A)
The monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 are different in 110 V AC, 220 V AC,
and –48 V DC power supply scenarios.

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply


Scenario
NOTE
If a DBS3900 is configured with an advanced power module (APM30) or APM30H (Ver.A), the DBS3900
can work only in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario. APM30H is short for advanced power module with
a heat-exchanger cooler.

Figure 6-143 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
one APM30, one transmission cabinet (TMC), and one backup battery cabinet (BBC) in a 110
V or 220 V AC power supply scenario.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-143 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30,
one TMC, and one BBC

Table 6-124 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-124 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30, one TMC,
and one BBC

SN Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


APMI and the BBU

S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status


Sensor

S5 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the


Batteries

S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the APM30


Transmission Cabinet

Figure 6-144 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC. TMC11H is short for transmission
cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-144 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC

Table 6-125 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-125 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.A),
one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC
SN Description

S1 Environment monitoring signal cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 and S7 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


HEUA and the BBU

S4 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the


Batteries

S5 and S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status


Sensor

Figure 6-145 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one integrated battery backup system with
TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-145 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T

Table 6-126 shows the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-126 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.A),
one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T
SN Description

S1 Environment monitoring signal cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 and S7 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


HEUA and the BBU

S4 IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable

S5 and S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status


Sensor

Figure 6-146 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
two APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two BBCs.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-146 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two
APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two BBCs

Table 6-127 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-127 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.A),
one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two BBCs
SN Description

S1 Environment monitoring signal cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 and S7 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


HEUA and the BBU

S4 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the


Batteries

S5 and S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status


Sensor

Figure 6-147 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
two APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two IBBS200Ts.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-147 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two
APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two IBBS200Ts

Table 6-128 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-128 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.A),
one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two IBBS200Ts
SN Description

S1 Environment monitoring signal cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 and S7 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


HEUA and the BBU

S4 IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable

S5 and S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status


Sensor

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


Figure 6-148 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
two TMCs in a –48 V DC power supply scenario.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-148 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two TMCs

Table 6-129 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-129 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two TMCs
SN Description

S1 and S2 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


APMI and the BBU

Figure 6-149 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
two TMC11Hs (Ver.A).

Figure 6-149 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two
TMC11Hs (Ver.A)

Table 6-130 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-130 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
SN Description

S1 and S2 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


HEUA and the BBU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

6.4.2 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B)


or APM30H (Ver.C)
The monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 are different in 110 V AC, 220 V AC,
and –48 V DC power supply scenarios.

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply


Scenario
Figure 6-150 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode
or dual-mode scenario.

Figure 6-150 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-
mode scenario

Table 6-131 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-131 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B),
one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

SN Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

SN Description

S3 and S5 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


CMUA and the BBU

Figure 6-151 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Figure 6-151 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-
mode scenario

Table 6-132 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-132 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C),
one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario

SN Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

S3 and S5 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE


and the BBU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-152 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.

Figure 6-152 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-
mode scenario

Table 6-133 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-133 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B),
one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode
scenario
SN Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

S3 and S5 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


CMUA and the BBU

S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded


CMUAs

Figure 6-153 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-153 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H
(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-
mode scenario

Table 6-134 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-134 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C),
one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode
scenario
SN Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

S3 and S5 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE


and the BBU

S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded


CMUAs

Figure 6-154 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-154 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two
APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-
mode or dual-mode scenario
S1 S2 S3 S1 S2 S6

S1 S1

S5

S6 S4 S6 S4

Table 6-135 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-135 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B),
one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode
scenario
SN Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

S3 and S5 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


CMUA and the BBU

S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded


CMUAs

Figure 6-155 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
two APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-155 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two
APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-
mode or dual-mode scenario

Table 6-136 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-136 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.C),
one TMC11H (Ver.C), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode
scenario
SN Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

S3 and S5 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE


and the BBU

S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded


CMUAs

In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured. BBU0 is configured in the basic cabinet
and BBU1 is configured in the extension cabinet. All the monitoring equipment is connected to
BBU0 instead of BBU1. The monitoring schemes are the same as in a dual-mode scenario.
Figure 6-156 shows the monitoring scheme in a triple-mode scenario taking the APM30H
(Ver.B) as an example.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-156 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two
APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a triple-mode
scenario

Table 6-137 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-137 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B),
one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a triple-mode scenario
SN Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

S3 and S5 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


CMUA and the BBU

S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded


CMUAs

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


Figure 6-157 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.

Figure 6-157 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two
TMC11Hs (Ver.B)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 6-138 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-138 Monitoring signal cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode
scenario
SN Description

S1 and S2 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


CMUA and the BBU

Figure 6-158 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with
two TMC11Hs (Ver.C).

Figure 6-158 Monitoring signal cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode
or dual-mode scenario

Table 6-139 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-139 Monitoring signal cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode or dual-mode
scenario
SN Description

S1 and S2 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE


and the BBU

In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured. BBU0 is configured in the basic TMC and
BBU1 is configured in the extension TMC. All the monitoring equipment is connected to BBU0
instead of BBU1. The monitoring schemes are the same as in a dual-mode scenario. Figure
6-159 shows the monitoring scheme in a triple-mode scenario taking the TMC11H (Ver.B) as
an example.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-159 Monitoring signal cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode
scenario

Table 6-140 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-140 Monitoring signal cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario
SN Description

S1 and S2 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the


CMUA and the BBU

6.4.3 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the OMB/IMB03/


IFS06
The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V
AC/220 V AC, –48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supply scenarios.

NOTE

l The monitoring signal cable connections for the IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 that is configured for the
DBS3900 are described in the DBS3900 (Ver.B) Installation Guide and DBS3900 (ICR) Installation
Guide. IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floor installation support.
l In the single-mode or dual-mode scenario, the DBS3900 is configured with the outdoor mini box
(OMB) or IMB03. The DBS3900 is configured with the IMB03+IFS06 in the single-mode, dual-mode
scenario, or triple-mode scenario.

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply


Scenario
Figure 6-160 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured
with an AC OMB.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-160 Connections of the monitoring signal cables for the AC OMB
S2 S2

S1
S4
S1 S3
S2
S3
S5 S5

S4

S2

Table 6-141 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-141 Monitoring signal cables for the AC OMB


SN Description

S1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status


Sensor

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan

S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA

S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC Surge


Protection Box

S5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DC


Power Equipment

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


Figure 6-161 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured
with a DC OMB.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 6-161 Connections of the DC OMB monitoring signal cables

Table 6-142 lists the monitoring signal cables.

Table 6-142 Monitoring signal cables for the DC OMB


SN Description

S1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status


Sensor

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan

S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

7 BBU3900 Cables

About This Chapter

This describes the cables of the BBU3900 in terms of their appearance, pin assignment, and
installation positions.

7.1 List of BBU3900 Cables


This chapter describes the BBU3900 cables. The BBU3900 cables are the PGND cable, BBU
power cable, E1/T1 cable, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE surge
protection transfer cable, interconnection cable between FE electrical ports, interconnection
cable between FE optical ports, CPRI optical cable, monitoring signal cable between the APMI
and the BBU, monitoring signal cable between HEUA and BBU, monitoring signal cable for
the EMUA, monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC), BBU alarm cable, and GPS clock signal cable.
7.2 PGND Cable
The PGND cable ensures the grounding of the BBU.
7.3 BBU Power Cable
This section describes the BBU power cable. Either -48 V power cable or +24 V power cable
can be used, depending on the power supply scenario.
7.4 BBU Power Cable (OMB)
The BBU power cable in the OMB is used to supply -48 V DC power to the BBU and HEUA.
The DC OMB and AC OMB require different power cables between the BBU and the HEUA.
7.5 BBU Power Cable (Ver.C)
A BBU power cable feeds power into a BBU.
7.6 E1/T1 Cable
The E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits baseband
signals.
7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable
This section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to the
transmission board. This cable is optional.
7.8 FE/GE Cable
The FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices and
transmits baseband signals.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable


The FE surge protection transfer cable is an optional cable that connects the main control board
to the UFLP.
7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports
The cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP
transmission.
7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports
The cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP
transmission.
7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable
The FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and the
transmission device. This cable is optional.
7.13 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable
CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber
optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.
7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU
This describes the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. It transmits the
environment monitoring signals of the power cabinet to the BBU.
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU transmits the monitoring
information collected by the HEUA to the BBU.
7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBU
and transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.
7.17 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable
This section describes the EMUA monitoring signal cable. It transmits monitoring signals from
the EMUA to the BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA.
7.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the power
fault alarms on the PSU.
7.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-position
status of the PSU.
7.20 BBU Alarm Cable
The BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU.
7.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable
The GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPS
antenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 246


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

7.1 List of BBU3900 Cables


This chapter describes the BBU3900 cables. The BBU3900 cables are the PGND cable, BBU
power cable, E1/T1 cable, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE surge
protection transfer cable, interconnection cable between FE electrical ports, interconnection
cable between FE optical ports, CPRI optical cable, monitoring signal cable between the APMI
and the BBU, monitoring signal cable between HEUA and BBU, monitoring signal cable for
the EMUA, monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC), BBU alarm cable, and GPS clock signal cable.
Table 7-1 describes the List of BBU3900 Cables.

Table 7-1 List of BBU3900 Cables


Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Connector Installation


Position Position

7.2 PGND OT terminal BBU/ OT terminal Nearest


Cable (6mm2, M4) Grounding bolt (6mm2, M8) grounding bar

7.3 BBU 3V3 connector BBU/UPEU/ OT terminal DCDU/LOAD6


Power PWR (6mm2, M4)
Cable
3V3 connector BBU/UPEU/ Easy Power EPS/LOAD1
PWR Receptacle
(Pressfit Type)
Connector

7.6 E1/T1 DB26 connector E1/T1 port on The connector Port on the
Cable the GTMU or needs to be made transmission
UELP or WMPT on site according device
or UTRP in the to the field
BBU requirements.

7.7 E1/T1 DB26 connector E1/T1 port on DB25 connector BBU/UELP/


Surge the GTMU or INSIDE
Protection WMPT or
Transfer UTRP in the
Cable BBU

7.8 FE/GE RJ-45 connector BBU/UFLP/ RJ-45 connector Port on the


Cable FE0 port at the transmission
OUTSIDE side device
BBU/GTMU or
WMPT/FE0
FE/GE port on
the UTRP in the
BBU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 247


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Connector Installation


Position Position

7.9 FE RJ-45 connector BBU/GTMU or RJ-45 connector BBU/UFLP/FE0


Surge WMPT/FE0 port at the
Protection FE/GE port on INSIDE side
Transfer the UTRP in the
Cable BBU
FE/GE port on
the LMPT in the
BBU

7.10 Cable RJ-45 connector BBU/WMPT/ RJ-45 connector BBU/GTMU/


Between FE0 FE0
Two FE
Electrical
Ports

7.11 Cable LC connector BBU/WMPT/ LC connector BBU/GTMU/


Between FE1 FE1
Two FE
Optical
Ports

7.12 FE/GE LC connector BBU/WMPT or FC/SC/LC Port on the


Optical GTMU/FE1 connector transmission
Cable device

7.13 CPRI DLC connector BBU/GTMU or DLC connector RRU/CPRI_W


Fiber Optic WBBP/CPRI
Cable

7.14 RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU or Twisted pair APMI/TX+, TX-,


Monitoring UEIU/MON1 RX+, RX-
Signal
Cable
Between the
APMI and
the BBU

7.15 RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU or RJ-45 connector HEUA/COM_IN


Monitoring UEIU/MON
Signal
Cable
Between the
HEUA and
the BBU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 248


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Connector Installation


Position Position

7.16 RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU or RJ-45 connector CMUA/


Monitoring UEIU/MON1 COM_IN
Signal
Cable
Between the
CMUA and
the BBU

7.17 EMUA RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU/ DB9 male EMUA/RS-485


Monitoring MON1 connector port
Signal
Cable

7.18 RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU or Cord end PSU(DC/DC)/


Monitoring UEIU/ terminal ALM
Signal EXT_ALM0
Cable for
the PSU
(DC/DC)

7.19 In- RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU or RJ-45 connector PSU(DC/DC)/


Position UEIU/ PRESENT
Signal EXT_ALM1
Cable for
the PSU
(DC/DC)

7.20 BBU RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU or RJ-45 connector Port on the


Alarm UEIU/ external
Cable EXT_ALM monitoring
device

7.21 GPS SMA male BBU/WMPT or N-type female GPS surge


Clock connector USCU/GPS connector protector
Signal
Cable

7.2 PGND Cable


The PGND cable ensures the grounding of the BBU.

Structure
The green and yellow PGND cable is a single cable with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2. Both
ends of the cable are OT terminals. If you prepare the cable by yourself, it is recommended that
you use a copper-based cable with a minimum cross-sectional area of 6 mm2.
Figure 7-1 shows the PGND cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 249


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 7-1 PGND cable

(1) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)

7.3 BBU Power Cable


This section describes the BBU power cable. Either -48 V power cable or +24 V power cable
can be used, depending on the power supply scenario.

Exterior
The BBU power cable depends on the type of the cabinet containing the BBU, because different
types of cabinet use different power supplies.

When the power supply device is the DCDU or PDU, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 connector
at one end and bare wires at the other end. Based on the connector of the power distribution
device, appropriate terminals are added to the bare wire end on site. Figure 7-2 shows the BBU
power cable with OT terminals at the bare wire end as an example.

Figure 7-2 BBU power cable (1)

(1) 3V3 connector (2) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)

NOTE

There are two wires in the -48 V power cable with a blue wire and a black wire. The +24 V power cable
and the -48 V power cable have the same exterior, but they differ in color. The +24 V power cable has a
red wire and a black wire.

When the power supply device is the EPS, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 connector at one
end and an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector at the other end. Figure 7-3 shows
the BBU power cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 250


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 7-3 BBU power cable (2)

(1) Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (2) 3V3 power connector

Pin Assignment
The power cable is a 2-wire cable. Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 describe the pin assignment for the
wires of the power cable.

Table 7-2 Pin assignment for the wires of the -48 V power cable
Pin on the 3V3 Color Description
Connector

A1 Blue -48 V

A2 - -

A3 Black GND

Table 7-3 Pin assignment for the wires of the +24 V power cable
Pin on the 3V3 Connector Color Description

A1 Red +24 V

A2 - -

A3 Black GND

7.4 BBU Power Cable (OMB)


The BBU power cable in the OMB is used to supply -48 V DC power to the BBU and HEUA.
The DC OMB and AC OMB require different power cables between the BBU and the HEUA.

Appearance
Figure 7-4 shows the appearance of power cable (AC OMB).

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 251


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 7-4 Appearance of power cable (AC OMB)

(1) 3V3 power connector for the BBU (2) H4 connector (3) 3V3 power connector for the HEUA

Figure 7-5 shows the appearance of power cable (DC OMB).

Figure 7-5 Appearance of power cable (DC OMB)

(1) 3V3 power connector (2) OT terminal

7.5 BBU Power Cable (Ver.C)


A BBU power cable feeds power into a BBU.

Exterior
Figure 7-6 shows a BBU power cable. The cable has a 3V3 power connector at one end and an
easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector at the other end.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 252


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 7-6 BBU power cable

(1) Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (2) 3V3 power connector

Pin Assignment
The BBU power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-4 lists the pin assignment for the wires of
the BBU power cable.

Table 7-4 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU power cable
Wire X1 End X2 End Wire Color in Most Wire Color in
Area Other Area

W1 X1.A1 X2.2 Blue Gray

W2 X1.A3 X2.1 Black Blue

7.6 E1/T1 Cable


The E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits baseband
signals.

Exterior
The E1/T1 cables are classified into two types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable and 120-ohm E1 twisted
pair cable.
One end of the E1/T1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the
cable should be made on site according to site requirements. Figure 7-7 shows an E1/T1 cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 253


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 7-7 E1/T1 cable

(1) DB26 male connector

Table 7-5 describes the connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable.

Table 7-5 Connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable

Cable One End The other End

75-ohm E1 coaxial cable DB26 male connector L9 male connector

L9 female connector

SMB female connector

BNC male connector

SMZ male connector

SMZ female connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-6 and Table 7-7 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 cable.

NOTE

In Table 7-6, "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable, and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of
the cable.

Table 7-6 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable

Pins of the DB26 Wire Type Coaxial Series No. Cable Label
Male Connector

X1.1 Tip 1 RX1+

X1.2 Ring RX1-

X1.3 Tip 3 RX2+

X1.4 Ring RX2-

X1.5 Tip 5 RX3+

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 254


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Pins of the DB26 Wire Type Coaxial Series No. Cable Label
Male Connector

X1.6 Ring RX3-

X1.7 Tip 7 RX4+

X1.8 Ring RX4-

X1.19 Tip 2 TX1+

X1.20 Ring TX1-

X1.21 Tip 4 TX2+

X1.22 Ring TX2-

X1.23 Tip 6 TX3+

X1.24 Ring TX3-

X1.25 Tip 8 TX4+

X1.26 Ring TX4-

Table 7-7 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable
Pins of the DB26 Wire Color Wire Type Cable Labels
Male Connector

X.1 Blue Twisted pair RX1+

X.2 White RX1-

X.3 Orange Twisted pair RX2+

X.4 White RX2-

X.5 Green Twisted pair RX3+

X.6 White RX3-

X.7 Brown Twisted pair RX4+

X.8 White RX4-

X.19 Gray Twisted pair TX1+

X.20 White TX1-

X.21 Blue Twisted pair TX2+

X.22 Red TX2-

X.23 Orange Twisted pair TX3+

X.24 Red TX3-

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 255


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Pins of the DB26 Wire Color Wire Type Cable Labels


Male Connector

X.25 Green Twisted pair TX4+

X.26 Red TX4-

7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable


This section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to the
transmission board. This cable is optional.

Exterior
The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25
male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable

(1) DB25 male connector (2) DB26 male connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-8 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable.

Table 7-8 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable

Pin on the DB26 Male Type Pin on the DB25 Male


Connector Connector

X1.20 Twisted pair cable X2.2

X1.19 X2.3

X1.4 Twisted pair cable X2.4

X1.3 X2.5

X1.22 Twisted pair cable X2.6

X1.21 X2.7

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 256


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Pin on the DB26 Male Type Pin on the DB25 Male


Connector Connector

X1.6 Twisted pair cable X2.8

X1.5 X2.9

X1.24 Twisted pair cable X2.10

X1.23 X2.11

X1.8 Twisted pair cable X2.12

X1.7 X2.13

X1.1 Twisted pair cable X2.14

X1.2 X2.15

X1.25 Twisted pair cable X2.24

X1.26 X2.25

7.8 FE/GE Cable


The FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices and
transmits baseband signals.
NOTE
The maximum length of the FE/GE cable for remote connection is 100 m.

Exterior
The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable. It has an RJ45 connector at each end, as
shown in Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 FE/GE cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-9 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 257


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Table 7-9 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable
Pin on the RJ45 Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector
Connector

X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2

X1.1 White and X2.1


orange

X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6

X1.3 White and X2.3


green

X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4

X1.5 White and blue X2.5

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8

X1.7 White and X2.7


brown

7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable


The FE surge protection transfer cable is an optional cable that connects the main control board
to the UFLP.

Exterior
The FE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure
7-10.

Figure 7-10 FE surge protection transfer cable

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-10 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 258


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Table 7-10 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable

Pin on the RJ45 Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector
Connector

X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2

X1.1 White X2.1

X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6

X1.3 White X2.3

X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4

X1.5 White X2.5

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8

X1.7 White X2.7

7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports


The cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP
transmission.

Structure
The cable between two FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure
7-11.

Figure 7-11 Cable between two FE electrical ports

(1) RJ45 connector

7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports


The cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP
transmission.

Structure
The cable between two FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as shown in Figure
7-12.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 259


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 7-12 Cable between two FE optical ports

(1) LC connector

7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable


The FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and the
transmission device. This cable is optional.

Exterior
The FE/GE optical cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,
or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-13, Figure 7-14, and Figure 7-15
respectively.

Figure 7-13 FE/GE optical cable (FC and LC connectors)

Figure 7-14 FE/GE optical cable (SC and LC connectors)

Figure 7-15 FE/GE optical cable (LC and LC connectors)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 260


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

CAUTION
When connecting the BBU3900 and the transmission device using the FE/GE optical cable,
adhere to the following rules:
l The TX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the RX port on the transmission device.
l The RX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the TX port on the transmission device.

7.13 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable


CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber
optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.

NOTE

l When the distance between a BBU and an RRU or between two RRUs is longer than 100 m (328. 08
ft.), an ODF is used between the BBU and RRU or between two RRUs.
l A single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU to an ODF or connects an ODF to an RRU.

Exterior
Figure 7-16 shows a fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs, with a
DLC connector at each end.

Figure 7-16 Fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs

(1) DLC connector (2) Branch (3) Label on the branch

When a multi-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the branches on the BBU
side and RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18 in.) long, respectively. When a multi-
mode fiber optic cable connects to two RRUs, the branches on both RRU sides are 0.03 m (1.18
in.) long.
Figure 7-17 shows the connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 261


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 7-17 Connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU

(1) CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU

Figure 7-18 shows a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an
ODF and an RRU, with a DLC connector at one end and an FC connector at the other end.

Figure 7-18 Single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and
an RRU

(1) DLC connector (2) Branch

(3) Label on the branch (4) FC connector

When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an ODF, the branches on the BBU
side and ODF side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.8 m (31.5 in.) long, respectively.
When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects an ODF and an RRU, the branches on the RRU
side and ODF side are 0.03 m (1.18 in.) and 0.8 m (31.5 in.) long, respectively.
Figure 7-19 shows the connections for a single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU
and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 262


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 7-19 Connections for a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or
between an ODF and an RRU

(1) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU (2) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between an
and an ODF ODF and an RRU

NOTE

CPRI fiber optic cables must be connected to the optical modules in the CPRI ports. Multi-mode fiber optic
cables and single-mode fiber optic cables are connected to multi-mode optical modules and single-mode optical
modules, respectively.

Pin Assignment
Table 7-11, Table 7-12, and Table 7-13 describe the labels on and recommended fiber optic
cable connections.

Table 7-11 Labels on and recommended connections for branches of a fiber optic cable between
a BBU and an RRU

Label Installation Position

1A CPRI RX port on the RRU

1B CPRI TX port on the RRU

2A TX port on the BBU

2B RX port on the BBU

Table 7-12 Labels on and recommended connections for branches of a fiber optic cable between
RRUs

Label Installation Position

1A CPRI RX port on RRU 1

1B CPRI TX port on RRU 1

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 263


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Label Installation Position

2A CPRI TX port on RRU 0

2B CPRI RX port on RRU 0

Table 7-13 Labels on and recommended connections for branches of a single-mode fiber optic
cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU

Label Installation Position

1A RX port on the BBU or CPRI RX port on the RRU

1B TX port on the BBU or CPRI TX port on the RRU

2A ODF

2B ODF

7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the


BBU
This describes the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. It transmits the
environment monitoring signals of the power cabinet to the BBU.

Structure
The monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU has an RJ-45 connector at one end
and four bare wires at the other end. Figure 7-20 shows the monitoring signal cable between
the APMI and the BBU.

Figure 7-20 Monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU

Pin Assignment
Table 7-14 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between
the APMI and the BBU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 264


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Table 7-14 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and
the BBU
Pin on the Color X2 to X5 Ends Description Terminal on the
RJ-45 APMI
Connector

X1.1 White X2 Twisted pair TX+

X1.2 Orange X3 TX-

X1.4 Blue X4 Twisted pair RX+

X1.5 White X5 RX-

7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the


BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU transmits the monitoring
information collected by the HEUA to the BBU.

Appearance
Figure 7-21 shows the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU.

Figure 7-21 Monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-15 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between
the HEUA and the BBU.

Table 7-15 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and
the BBU
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 265


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the


BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBU
and transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.

Exterior
Figure 7-22 shows the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU.

Figure 7-22 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-16 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between
the CMUA and the BBU.

Table 7-16 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and
the BBU

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 266


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.17 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable


This section describes the EMUA monitoring signal cable. It transmits monitoring signals from
the EMUA to the BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA.

Exterior
Figure 7-23 shows the EMUA monitoring signal cable.

Figure 7-23 EMUA monitoring signal cable

(1) RJ-45 connector (2) DB9 male connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-17 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable.

Table 7-17 Pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable

Pin on the Pin on the DB9 Color Description Terminal on


RJ-45 Male Connector the APMI
Connector

X1.1 X2.3 White Twisted pair TX+

X1.2 X2.7 Orange TX-

X1.5 X2.6 White Twisted pair RX-

X1.4 X2.2 Blue RX+

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 267


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

7.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)


The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the power
fault alarms on the PSU.

Structure
Figure 7-24 shows the Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).

Figure 7-24 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

Pin Assignment
Table 7-18 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC).

Table 7-18 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

X1 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.2 Blue Twisted pair

X1.1 White

X1.6 Orange Twisted pair

X1.3 White

X1.4 Green Twisted pair

X1.5 White

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair

X1.7 White

7.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)


The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-position
status of the PSU.

Exterior
Figure 7-25 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 268


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 7-25 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

(1) RJ45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-19 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC).

Table 7-19 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

7.20 BBU Alarm Cable


The BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU.

Exterior
The BBU alarm cable has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-26. However,
an RJ-45 connector at one end may be removed, and an appropriate terminal may be added
according to the field requirements.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 269


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 7-26 BBU alarm cable

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 7-20 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable.

Table 7-20 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable

BBU Pin on the Wire Wire Pin on the Description


Alarm RJ45 Color Type RJ45
Port Connecto Connecto
r at One r at the
End Other
End

EXT- X1.1 White and Twisted X2.1 Boolean value input 4+


ALM1 orange pair

X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean value input 4-


(GND)

X1.3 White and Twisted X2.3 Boolean value input 5+


green pair

X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean value input 5-


(GND)

X1.5 White and Twisted X2.5 Boolean value input 6+


blue pair

X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean value input 6-


(GND)

X1.7 White and Twisted X2.7 Boolean value input 7+


brown pair

X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean value input 7-


(GND)

EXT- X1.1 White and Twisted X2.1 Boolean value input 0+


ALM0 orange pair

X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean value input 0-


(GND)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 270


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables

BBU Pin on the Wire Wire Pin on the Description


Alarm RJ45 Color Type RJ45
Port Connecto Connecto
r at One r at the
End Other
End

X1.3 White and Twisted X2.3 Boolean value input 1+


green pair

X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean value input 1-


(GND)

X1.5 White and Twisted X2.5 Boolean value input 2+


blue pair

X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean value input 2-


(GND)

X1.7 White and Twisted X2.7 Boolean value input 3+


brown pair

X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean value input 3-


(GND)

7.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable


The GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPS
antenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.

Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type female
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-27.

Figure 7-27 GPS clock signal cable

(1) SMA male connector (2) N-type female connector

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 271


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

About This Chapter

This describes the auxiliary devices of the BBU3900. The devices consist of the EMUA and
SLPU.

8.1 EMUA
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet
and reports related alarms.
8.2 OMB
The Outdoor Mini Box (OMB) is an outdoor BBU subrack, which is used outdoors. The OMB
cabinet is equipped with the BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU and transmission
equipment. The OMB cabinet is easy to install and maintain. The cable distribution for internal
modules is convenient. The OMB cabinet has good waterproof and dustproof performance, and
the grounding function. In addition, the OMB cabinet provides the protection against moisture,
mould, and salt fog damage.
8.3 IMB03
The Indoor Mini Box (IMB03) is an indoor subrack with a small capacity. It houses a built-in
BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU, or other power equipment.
8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized Rack
A 10 U indoor centralized rack is installed indoors to provide a 19-inch wide space for equipment.
8.5 DCDU-03
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03) supplies DC power to each component in
the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03 is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B and
DCDU-03C according to the configured MCBs and application scenarios. The two models have
the same exterior and engineering specifications.
8.6 DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C
The DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C are 1 U-high direct current distribution units, which supply
power to each component in the cabinet. They have the same exterior, engineering specifications,
and ports but different circuit breaker specifications and usage scenarios.
8.7 AC/DC Power Equipment
The AC/DC power equipment consists of the 4815 power system and 2-DC-input power
distribution box. The equipment is used to lead 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, convert

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 272


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

the 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supply -48 V DC
power to the components in the cabinet.
8.8 SLPU
The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,
UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.
8.9 WGRU
The WGRU (WCDMA GPS Receiving Unit) receives and processes positioning information
and synchronization timing signals from the GPS, and then outputs the timing signals as a system
clock source. These timing signals and positioning information can be used to generate PPS
signals and Network Assisted GPS (AGPS) positioning information. The WGRU is optional for
the NodeB which is installed in the WGRU box. The NodeB can be configured with one WGRU
which provides the positioning function.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 273


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

8.1 EMUA
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet
and reports related alarms.

The EMUA is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring the
environment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA monitors the following
items:

l Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke
l Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor
l Power distribution

For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.

8.2 OMB
The Outdoor Mini Box (OMB) is an outdoor BBU subrack, which is used outdoors. The OMB
cabinet is equipped with the BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU and transmission
equipment. The OMB cabinet is easy to install and maintain. The cable distribution for internal
modules is convenient. The OMB cabinet has good waterproof and dustproof performance, and
the grounding function. In addition, the OMB cabinet provides the protection against moisture,
mould, and salt fog damage.

Appearance
Figure 8-1 shows the OMB cabinet.

Figure 8-1 Appearance of the OMB(Unit: mm)

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 274


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Functions
The functions of the OMB cabinet are as follows:
l Providing 3 U installation space for the distributed BTS.
l Supporting the AC input modes of 220 V single-phase, 110 V dual-live two-phase.
l Supporting -48 V DC power input.
l Providing secure and reliable surge protection and inductive lightning protection through
the AC surge protection box (optional).
l Connecting the grounding bus of the cabinet, PGND cable of the surge protector, and PGND
cables of other devices to the grounding busbar of the cabinet.
l Dissipating heat by using the core of the heat exchanger and outer and inner air circulation
fans and enabling excellent heat dissipation.
l Protecting itself against dust, adapting to different environments even though in adverse
air conditions.
l Being capable of working with the distributed or separated base stations and meeting the
requirements in different scenarios.

Structure
There are two types of OMBs, that is, the AC OMB and DC OMB.
The AC OMB houses the HEUA, BBU, AC/DC power equipment, and AC surge protection
box, as shown in Figure 8-2.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 275


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-2 Hardware structure of the AC OMB

(1) HEUA (2) BBU (3) AC/DC power equipment (4) AC surge protection box

The DC OMB houses the HEUA, BBU, and DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 8-3.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 276


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-3 Hardware structure of the DC OMB

(1) HEUA (2) BBU (3) DCDU-03B

Specifications
Table 8-1 lists the specifications of the OMB.

Table 8-1 Specifications of the OMB

Item Specification

Dimensions 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (height x width


x depth)

Weight OMB subrack: ≤ 15 kg


AC OMB: ≤ 25 kg
DC OMB: ≤ 22.5kg

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 277


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Item Specification

Temperature Without solar radiation: -40°C to +50°C


Short-term working at 50°C to 55°C
NOTE
The short-term work indicates that the continuous
work does not exceed 96 hours or the accumulated
working time in a year does not exceed 15 days.

Relative humidity 5% to 100%

8.3 IMB03
The Indoor Mini Box (IMB03) is an indoor subrack with a small capacity. It houses a built-in
BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU, or other power equipment.

Exterior
Figure 8-4 shows an IMB03.

Figure 8-4 IMB03

(1) Front cover plate of the IMB03 (2) Protection cover

(3) Warning label to avoid treading (4) Slots of internal modules in the IMB03

Functions
The IMB03 performs the following functions:
l Provides a 3 U space for a distributed base station.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 278


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

l Supports 220 V single-phase AC input and 110 V dual-live-wire AC input.


l Supports power input of -48 V DC.
l Supports various installation modes, including the wall-mounting mode, rack-mounting
mode, and combined-with-IFS06 mode.
l Provides a well-developed function of heat dissipation and facilitates cabling of internal
modules.

Structure
There are two types of IMB03, that is, the DC IMB03 and AC IMB03.

A DC IMB03 houses the BBU and DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5 DC IMB03

(1) DCDU-03B (2) BBU

An AC IMB03 houses a BBU and AC/DC power equipment, as shown in Figure 8-6.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 279


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-6 AC IMB03

(1) AC/DC power equipment (2) BBU

Specifications
Table 8-2 lists the specifications of the IMB03.

Table 8-2 Specifications of the IMB03

Item Specification

Dimensions 560 mm (22.05 in.) x 425 mm (16.73 in.) x


180 mm (7.09 in.) (height x width x depth)

Weight 10 kg

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 280


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized Rack


A 10 U indoor centralized rack is installed indoors to provide a 19-inch wide space for equipment.

Exterior
A 10 U indoor centralized rack is 19-inch wide and 10 U high, as shown in Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7 10 U indoor centralized rack

(1) Left frame (2) Right frame

Functions
A 10 U indoor centralized rack provides the following functions:
l Provides a 10 U space for a distributed base station.
l Supports power input of -48 V DC.
l Connects the main ground cable for the rack and ground cable for equipment to the ground
terminal on the rack.

Specifications
Table 8-3 lists the specifications for the 10 U indoor centralized rack.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 281


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Table 8-3 Specifications for the 10 U indoor centralized rack


Item Specification

Dimensions (H x W x D) 700 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (27.56 in. x


23.62 in. x 17.72 in.)

Weight 15 kg (33.08 lb)

8.5 DCDU-03
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03) supplies DC power to each component in
the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03 is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B and
DCDU-03C according to the configured MCBs and application scenarios. The two models have
the same exterior and engineering specifications.

Exterior
Figure 8-8 shows the DCDU-03.

Figure 8-8 DCDU-03

Functions
The DCDU-03 provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different MCB configurations to meet the
power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and separated base stations.
Table 8-4 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 282


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Table 8-4 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03


DCDU DC Output Power MCB MCB Applicatio
Model Terminal Consumpti Specificati Quantity n Scenario
on on
Equipment

DCDU-03B LOAD0 to RRU 20 A 6 Distributed


LOAD5 base station/
Mini base
LOAD6 to BBU and the 12 A 3 station
LOAD8 transmission
equipment of
the customer

DCDU-03C LOAD0 to Transmissio 12 A 6 Separated


LOAD5 n equipment macro base
of the station in the
customer -48 V DC
power
LOAD6 BBU 12 A 1 supply/
LOAD7 Transmissio 6A 1 Transmissio
n equipment n cabinet
of the
customer

LOAD8 Fan box 6A 1

Ports
Figure 8-9 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 283


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-9 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03

Table 8-5 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03.

Table 8-5 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03


Port Specification Power Cable Cross- Remarks
Sectional Area

DC input Supports the l DCDU-03B: When the DCDU-03C is used


terminal M6 2-hole OT maximum = 25mm2, in the transmission cabinet,
terminal (one default = 25mm2, the cross-sectional area of the
input) input power cable is 4 mm2.
l DCDU-03C:
maximum = 25mm2,
default = 16mm2,

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 284


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Port Specification Power Cable Cross- Remarks


Sectional Area

DC output Supports the Maximum = 6mm2 l The specification for a


terminal M4 single hole power cable depends on
OT terminal (9 the device to which the
outputs) cable is connected. For
example, the specification
for a fan power cable is 2.5
mm2.
l Three rows of wiring
terminals for outputs:
NEG(-), RTN(+), and
PGND, where, the last
three pairs of the PGND
wiring terminals support
the grounding of the M4 2-
hole OT terminals, which
are marked in red in
Figure 8-9

8.6 DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C


The DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C are 1 U-high direct current distribution units, which supply
power to each component in the cabinet. They have the same exterior, engineering specifications,
and ports but different circuit breaker specifications and usage scenarios.

Exterior
Figure 8-10 and Figure 8-11 show the front and rear views of a DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
respectively.

Figure 8-10 Front view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 285


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-11 Rear view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C

NOTE
The DCDU-11C does not use the equipotential connection point and ground point. The DCDU-11B uses
the equipotential connection point or ground point only in one of the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-11B is placed in an open rack and is connected to the ground bar of the open
rack by using the equipotential connection point near the mounting ears.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-11B is mounted on a wall to serve as an independent power distribution device,
which is connected to the ground bar in the equipment room by using the ground point at the rear of
the DCDU-11B.

Function
The DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C provides ten –48 V DC outputs. Different circuit breaker
configurations can meet power distribution requirements for a distributed or outdoor macro base
station.

Table 8-6 lists the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.

Table 8-6 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C

DCDU DC Equipment Circuit Circuit Description


Type Output Breaker Breaker
Termina Specifica
l tions

DCDU-11 LOAD0 RRU0 to RRU5 25 A SW0 to Distributed or


B to SW5 mini base station
LOAD5

LOAD6 BBU or transmission 25 A SW6


equipment

LOAD7 BBU or transmission 25 A SW7


equipment

LOAD8 EMUA or 25 A SW8


transmission
equipment

LOAD9 Fan box 25 A SW9

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 286


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

DCDU DC Equipment Circuit Circuit Description


Type Output Breaker Breaker
Termina Specifica
l tions

DCDU-11 LOAD0 Transmission 6A SW0 –48 V outdoor


C equipment macro base
station or
LOAD1 Transmission 6A SW1 transmission
equipment cabinet
LOAD2 Transmission 12 A SW2
equipment

LOAD3 Transmission 12 A SW3


equipment

LOAD4 Transmission 25 A SW4


equipment

LOAD5 Transmission 25 A SW5


equipment

LOAD6 BBU or transmission 25 A SW6


equipment

LOAD7 BBU or transmission 25 A SW7


equipment

LOAD8 EMUA or 25 A SW8


transmission
equipment

LOAD9 Fan box 25 A SW9

Ports
Figure 8-12 shows the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 287


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-12 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C

Table 8-7 describes specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.

Table 8-7 Specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C


S Port Label Terminal and Description
N Cable

(1) DC input NEG(-) M6 one-hole OT Negative power input wiring


terminal terminal (two wires) terminal
and a maximum
RTN(+) cross-sectional area Positive power input wiring
of 25 mm2. terminal

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 288


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

S Port Label Terminal and Description


N Cable

(2) DC LOAD0 to DCDU-11B: For details about DC output


output LOAD9 l Figure 8-13 specifications, see Table 8-6.
terminal shows an easy
power receptacle
(pressfit type)
connector
adapting to
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
terminals. The
maximum cross-
sectional area is
10 mm2.
l Figure 8-14
shows an easy
power receptacle
(pressfit type)
connector
adapting to
LOAD6 to
LOAD9
terminals. The
maximum cross-
sectional area is 4
mm2.
DCDU-11C: Figure
8-14 shows an easy
power receptacle
(pressfit type)
connector adapting to
LOAD0 to LOAD9
terminals. The
maximum cross-
sectional area is 4
mm2.

(3) Circuit SW0 to SW9 - The circuit breakers SW0 to


breaker SW9 control the ports LOAD0
to LOAD9 respectively,
controlling the power supplies
to the BBU, fan box, DC heater,
and transmission equipment.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 289


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-13 Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (1)

Figure 8-14 Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (2)

8.7 AC/DC Power Equipment


The AC/DC power equipment consists of the 4815 power system and 2-DC-input power
distribution box. The equipment is used to lead 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, convert
the 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supply -48 V DC
power to the components in the cabinet.

Appearance
Figure 8-15 shows the AC/DC power equipment.

Figure 8-15 AC/DC power equipment

(1) AC power supply socket (2) Wiring terminal for the RRU

(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment (4) Power distribution control switch for the RRU

(5) Power distribution control switch for the transmission (6) Rectifier
equipment

(7) Monitoring port (8) DC output port LOAD1

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 290


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

(9) DC output port LOAD2 (10) Output port for the batteries BATT

Interface
Table 8-8 describes the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.

Table 8-8 Panel of the AC/DC power equipment

Interface Label Description Connector Type


Type

AC power INPUT AC power supply socket 3-pin male connector


supply socket

Monitoring RS232 Reserved port -


port
RS485 Monitoring port for the RJ-45 connector
rectifier

COM Reserved port -

DC output port LOAD1 Output port for the BBU and H4 connector
HEUA(10A)

LOAD2 Output port for the H4 connector


transmission equipment
(20A)

BAT Output port for the batteries H4 connector


(20A)

DC output RRU Wiring terminal for the RRU OT terminal


wiring power cable(12A)
terminal
TM Wiring terminal for the OT terminal
power cable for the
transmission equipment(4A)

LED
Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the panel of the rectifier in the AC/DC power equipment.

Table 8-9 LEDs on the panel of the rectifier

Label Color Name Status Description

RUN Green Run LED ON The rectifier is running properly.

OFF An error occurs during the running


of the rectifier.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 291


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Label Color Name Status Description

ALARM Yellow Alarm LED ON Output overcurrent alarm or


overtemperature alarm

Blinking The communication is disrupted.

OFF The rectifier is running properly.

FAULT Red Fault LED ON Fan faults, output overvoltage, and


external short circuit.

OFF The rectifier is running properly.

Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power
equipment.

Table 8-10 LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module


Label Color Name Status Description

RUN Green Run LED Blinking (on The module is running properly.
for 1s and off
for 1s)

Blinking (on The module is not faulty but unable


for 0.125s to communicate with the PMU
and off for properly.
0.125s)

ALM Red Alarm LED ON An alarm is generated.

OFF No alarm is generated.

DIP Switches
Figure 8-16 shows the DIP switches on the PMU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 292


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-16 DIP switches on the PMU

Table 8-11 describes the settings of the DIP switches on the PMU.

Table 8-11 Settings of the DIP switches on the PMU


No. Function Operation

1~5 Defines the communication (1) Switches 1 to 5


address of the PMU correspond to bits 0 to 4. ON:
1, OFF: 0
For example: to set the
address of PMU to 3, set
switches 3 to 5 as OFF.
(2) Default setting before
delivery:
1 (BIT0), ON
2 (BIT1), ON
3 (BIT2), OFF
4 (BIT3), OFF
5 (BIT4), OFF

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 293


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

No. Function Operation

6 Selects baud rate for Set as ON, indicating that the


communicating with the BTS baud rate is 9600. (If it is set
as OFF, the baud rate is
19200.)

7 and 8 Reserved and not defined Set as OFF

Specifications
Table 8-12 lists the specifications of the AC/DC Power Equipment.

Table 8-12 Specifications of the AC/DC Power Equipment


Item Specification

Input voltage range 176 V AC to 290 V AC for the 220 V AC single-phase input
power
90 V AC to 175 V AC for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input
power

Frequency of the input 45 Hz to 65 Hz


voltage

Output voltage range –42 V DC to –58 V DC

Output current 15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power


7.5 A for the110 V AC dual-live-wire input power

Surge protection capability 2 kA in differential mode


4 kA in common mode

8.8 SLPU
The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,
UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.

8.8.1 Exterior of SLPU


The SLPU has a case structure, which requires a 19-inch wide and 1 U high space.
Figure 8-17 shows the SLPU.

Figure 8-17 SLPU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 294


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

8.8.2 Configuration of the SLPU


This section describes the configuration principles of the SPLU.

Slots of the SLPU


Figure 8-18 shows the slots of the SLPU.

Figure 8-18 Slots of the SLPU

Configuration of the SLPU


When serving as a trunk signal protection unit, the SLPU is a mandatory component, and it is
integrated with a UELP or UFLP and installed in the 1 U space in the upper part of the cabinet.
Table 8-13 lists the configuration principles of the SLPU.

Table 8-13 Configuration principles of the SLPU (1)


Board Optional/ Maximum Slot Configuration
Mandatory Quantity Restriction

UELP Optional 4 Slots 0 to 3 The priorities of


the slots in
configuration
are as follows in
descending
order: slot 2, slot
0, slot 1, and slot
3.

UFLP Optional 1 Slot 3 If both the


UELP and
UFLP are
configured, the
UFLP is
installed in a slot
with a higher
priority than the
UELP.

When serving as a monitoring signal protection unit for not more than 16 dry contacts, the SLPU
is an optional component, and it is integrated with two USLP2s and installed in the 1 U space
at the bottom of the BBU. Table 8-14 lists the configuration principles of the SLPU.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 295


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Table 8-14 Configuration principles of the SLPU (2)


Board Optional/ Quantity Slot Configuration
Mandatory Restriction

USLP2 Optional 2 Slots 2 and 3 -

8.8.3 UELP
Each Universal E1/T1 Lightning Protection Unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four
paths of E1/T1 signals.

Panel
Figure 8-19 shows the panel of the UELP.

Figure 8-19 UELP panel

Ports
Table 8-15 lists the ports of the UELP.

Table 8-15 Ports of the UELP


Label Connector Description

INSIDE DB25 connector Connected to the board for


transmission in the base station

OUTSIDE DB26 connector Connected to the external


transmission devices

DIP Switch
The UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded.
The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 8-20 shows the DIP switch on the UELP.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 296


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-20 DIP switch on the UELP

Table 8-16 describes the DIP switch on the UELP.

Table 8-16 DIP switch on the UELP


DIP Bit Status Description
Switch
1 2 3 4

S1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Not grounded

Other status Grounded

NOTE
The 75-ohm E1 cable can be either grounded or not grounded, whereas the 120-ohm E1 cable and the 100-
ohm T1 cable cannot be grounded.

8.8.4 UFLP
The universal FE/GE lightning protection (UFLP) board is a universal FE surge protection unit,
each UFLP supports 2-way FE surge protection.

Panel
Figure 8-21 shows the panel of the UFLP.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 297


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-21 Panel of the UFLP

Ports
Table 8-17 describes the ports on the panel of the UFLP.

Table 8-17 Ports on the panel of the UFLP

Port Location Label Connector Type Description

INSIDE side FE0, FE1 RJ-45 Connected to the


board for
transmission in the
base station

OUTSIDE side FE0, FE1 RJ-45 Connected to the


external
transmission
devices

8.8.5 USLP2
The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protection
unit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.

Panel
Figure 8-22 shows the panel of the USLP2.

Figure 8-22 Panel of the USLP2

Port
There are four input ports and two output ports on the USLP2. Table 8-18 lists the ports on the
panel of the USLP2.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 298


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Table 8-18 Ports on the panel of the USLP2

Label Port Type Quantity Description

IN0, IN1, IN2, 4-pin 4 Input ports used to


and IN3 connect the customized
alarm devices.

OUT0, OUT1 RJ45 2 Output ports used to


connect the EXT-ALM
port of the UEIU or
UPEU in the cabinet.

Figure 8-23 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on
the USLP2.

Figure 8-23 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
OUT0 OUT1 IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2

Table 8-19 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the
USLP2.

Table 8-19 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2

Input Output

Label Pin Label Pin

IN0 IN0.1 OUT1 OUT1.1

IN0.2 OUT1.2

IN0.3 OUT1.4

IN0.4 OUT1.5

IN1 IN1.1 OUT1.3

IN1.2 OUT1.6

IN1.3 OUT1.7

IN1.4 OUT1.8

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 299


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Input Output

Label Pin Label Pin

IN2 IN2.1 OUT0 OUT0.1

IN2.2 OUT0.2

IN2.3 OUT0.4

IN2.4 OUT0.5

IN3 IN3.1 OUT0.3

IN3.2 OUT0.6

IN3.3 OUT0.7

IN3.4 OUT0.8

For details about the application of the USLP2, see 8.8.2 Configuration of the SLPU.

8.9 WGRU
The WGRU (WCDMA GPS Receiving Unit) receives and processes positioning information
and synchronization timing signals from the GPS, and then outputs the timing signals as a system
clock source. These timing signals and positioning information can be used to generate PPS
signals and Network Assisted GPS (AGPS) positioning information. The WGRU is optional for
the NodeB which is installed in the WGRU box. The NodeB can be configured with one WGRU
which provides the positioning function.

Appearance
Figure 8-24 shows the exterior of WGRU, Figure 8-25 shows the WGRU installed in the WGRU
box.

Figure 8-24 Exterior of the WGRU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 300


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-25 WGRU installed in the WGRU box

Panel
The components on the front panel of the WGRU suite are LEDs, RST button, and output ports.
The Figure 8-26 shows the front panel of the WGRU.
The components on the rear panel are the power input socket and the GPS signal input port. The
Figure 8-27 shows the rear panel of the WGRU box.

Figure 8-26 Front panel of the WGRU

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 301


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 8-27 Rear panel of the WGRU box

Indicators on the Front Panel of the WGRU


This describes indicators on the front panel of the WGRU. There are three indicators, that is the
RUN, ALM, and ACT indicators on the front panel of the WGRU.

Table 8-20 describes the indicators.

Table 8-20 Indicators on the front panel of the WGRU

Indicator Color Status Meaning

RUN Green On for 1s and off for The WGRU suite


1s works properly.

On The power supply is


normal but the
WGRU suite is
faulty.

Off The power supply is


abnormal or the
WGRU suite is
faulty.

ALM Red Off There is no alarm.

On There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green On The WGRU suite


obtains correct
positioning
information.

Off The WGRU suite


cannot obtain correct
positioning
information.

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 302


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Ports on the Front Panel of the WGRU


The following describes the ports on the front panel of the WGRU. The ports consist of PPS1,
PPS2, COM1, COM2, CLK1, and CLK2.
Table 8-21 lists the ports.

Table 8-21 Ports on the front panel of the WGRU


Name Type Description

PPS1 RJ-45 It outputs PPS signals

PPS2 RJ-45 Obligate

COM1 RJ-45 It is used to transmit GPS


information and exchange
management and
maintenance information
with BBU.

COM2 RJ-45 Obligate

CLK1 RJ-45 Obligate

CLK2 RJ-45 Obligate

Ports on the Rear Panel


The rear panel of the WGRU consists of the POWER port and ANT port.
Table 8-22 describes the ports on the rear panel of the WGRU.

Table 8-22 Ports on the rear panel of the WGRU


Port Label Connector Description

POWER Two-pole male connector Used to feed external power

ANT N-type female connector Used for the connection to


the GPS antenna system

Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 303


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

You might also like